Sie sind auf Seite 1von 352

Technical

Publications

2234976
Revision 3

CT Sytec/Sytec i Series
Functional Check /Adjustment

Copyrighte 1999, 2003 by General Electric Company

Operating Documentation
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

D THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY.


WARNING D IF A CUSTOMER’S SERVICE PROVIDER REQUIRES A LANGUAGE OTHER
THAN ENGLISH, IT IS THE CUSTOMER’S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE
TRANSLATION SERVICES.
D DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS THIS SERVICE
MANUAL HAS BEEN CONSULTED AND IS UNDERSTOOD.
D FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO THE SERVICE
PROVIDER, OPERATOR OR PATIENT FROM ELECTRIC SHOCK, MECHANICAL
OR OTHER HAZARDS.

D CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE N’EST DISPONIBLE QU’EN ANGLAIS.


AVERTISSEMENT D SI LE TECHNICIEN DU CLIENT A BESOIN DE CE MANUEL DANS UNE AUTRE
LANGUE QUE L’ANGLAIS, C’EST AU CLIENT QU’IL INCOMBE DE LE FAIRE
TRADUIRE.
D NE PAS TENTER D’INTERVENTION SUR LES ÉQUIPEMENTS TANT QUE LE
MANUEL SERVICE N’A PAS ÉTÉ CONSULTÉ ET COMPRIS.
D LE NON-RESPECT DE CET AVERTISSEMENT PEUT ENTRAÎNER CHEZ LE
TECHNICIEN, L’OPÉRATEUR OU LE PATIENT DES BLESSURES DUES À DES
DANGERS ÉLECTRIQUES, MÉCANIQUES OU AUTRES.

D DIESES KUNDENDIENST–HANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN


ENGLISCHER SPRACHE.
WARNUNG
D FALLS EIN FREMDER KUNDENDIENST EINE ANDERE SPRACHE BENÖTIGT,
IST ES AUFGABE DES KUNDEN FÜR EINE ENTSPRECHENDE ÜBERSETZUNG
ZU SORGEN.
D VERSUCHEN SIE NICHT, DAS GERÄT ZU REPARIEREN, BEVOR DIESES
KUNDENDIENST–HANDBUCH NICHT ZU RATE GEZOGEN UND VERSTANDEN
WURDE.
D WIRD DIESE WARNUNG NICHT BEACHTET, SO KANN ES ZU VERLETZUNGEN
DES KUNDENDIENSTTECHNIKERS, DES BEDIENERS ODER DES PATIENTEN
DURCH ELEKTRISCHE SCHLÄGE, MECHANISCHE ODER SONSTIGE
GEFAHREN KOMMEN.

D ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SÓLO EXISTE EN INGLÉS.


AVISO D SI ALGÚN PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS AJENO A GEMS SOLICITA UN IDIOMA
QUE NO SEA EL INGLÉS, ES RESPONSABILIDAD DEL CLIENTE OFRECER UN
SERVICIO DE TRADUCCIÓN.
D NO SE DEBERÁ DAR SERVICIO TÉCNICO AL EQUIPO, SIN HABER
CONSULTADO Y COMPRENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO.
D LA NO OBSERVANCIA DEL PRESENTE AVISO PUEDE DAR LUGAR A QUE EL
PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS, EL OPERADOR O EL PACIENTE SUFRAN
LESIONES PROVOCADAS POR CAUSAS ELÉCTRICAS, MECÁNICAS O DE OTRA
NATURALEZA.

a
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

D ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA SÓ SE ENCONTRA


DISPONÍVEL EM INGLÊS.
ATENÇÃO
D SE QUALQUER OUTRO SERVIÇO DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA, QUE NÃO A
GEMS, SOLICITAR ESTES MANUAIS NOUTRO IDIOMA, É DA
RESPONSABILIDADE DO CLIENTE FORNECER OS SERVIÇOS DE TRADUÇÃO.
D NÃO TENTE REPARAR O EQUIPAMENTO SEM TER CONSULTADO E
COMPREENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA.
D O NÃO CUMPRIMENTO DESTE AVISO PODE POR EM PERIGO A SEGURANÇA
DO TÉCNICO, OPERADOR OU PACIENTE DEVIDO A‘ CHOQUES ELÉTRICOS,
MECÂNICOS OU OUTROS.

D IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE È DISPONIBILE


SOLTANTO IN INGLESE.
AVVERTENZA
D SE UN ADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE ESTERNO ALLA GEMS RICHIEDE IL
MANUALE IN UNA LINGUA DIVERSA, IL CLIENTE È TENUTO A PROVVEDERE
DIRETTAMENTE ALLA TRADUZIONE.
D SI PROCEDA ALLA MANUTENZIONE DELL’APPARECCHIATURA SOLO DOPO
AVER CONSULTATO IL PRESENTE MANUALE ED AVERNE COMPRESO IL
CONTENUTO.
D NON TENERE CONTO DELLA PRESENTE AVVERTENZA POTREBBE FAR
COMPIERE OPERAZIONI DA CUI DERIVINO LESIONI ALL’ADDETTO ALLA
MANUTENZIONE, ALL’UTILIZZATORE ED AL PAZIENTE PER
FOLGORAZIONE ELETTRICA, PER URTI MECCANICI OD ALTRI RISCHI.

b
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

IMPORTANT! . . . X-RAY PROTECTION


X-ray equipment if not properly used may cause injury. Accordingly, the instructions herein contained
should be thoroughly read and understood by everyone who will use the equipment before you attempt to
place this equipment in operation. The General Electric Company, Medical Systems Group, will be glad to
assist and cooperate in placing this equipment in use.
Although this apparatus incorporates a high degree of protection against x-radiation other than the useful beam, no
practical design of equipment can provide complete protection. Nor can any practical design compel the operator to
take adequate precautions to prevent the possibility of any persons carelessly exposing themselves or others to
radiation.
It is important that everyone having anything to do with x-radiation be properly trained and fully acquainted with the
recommendations of the National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements as published in NCRP Reports
available from NCRP Publications, 7910 Woodmont Avenue, Room 1016, Bethesda, Maryland 20814, and of the
International Commission on Radiation Protection, and take adequate steps to protect against injury.
The equipment is sold with the understanding that the General Electric Company, Medical Systems Group, its agents,
and representatives have no responsibility for injury or damage which may result from improper use of the equipment.
Various protective material and devices are available. It is urged that such materials or devices be used.

    



 
All electrical installations that are preliminary to positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the equipment shall be
performed by licensed electrical contractors. In addition, electrical feeds into the Power Distribution Unit shall be performed
by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of electrical equipment, calibrations, and testing shall
be performed by qualified GE Medical personnel. The products involved (and the accompanying electrical installations) are
highly sophisticated, and special engineering competence is required.

In performing all electrical work on these products, GE will use its own specially trained field engineers. All of GE’s electrical
work on these products will comply with the requirements of the applicable electrical codes.

The purchaser of GE equipment shall only utilize qualified personnel (i.e., GE’s field engineers, personnel of third-party
service companies with equivalent training, or licensed electricians) to perform electrical servicing on the equipment.

c
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION

All packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is apparent, have notation “damage in
shipment” written on all copies of the freight or express bill before delivery is accepted or “signed for” by a General
Electric representative or a hospital receiving agent. Whether noted or concealed, damage MUST be reported to the
carrier immediately upon discovery, or in any event, within 14 days after receipt, and the contents and containers held
for inspection by the carrier. A transportation company will not pay a claim for damage if an inspection is not requested
within this 14 day period.

Call Traffic and Transportation, Milwaukee, WI (414) 827–3449 / 8*285–3449 immediately after damage is found. At
this time be ready to supply name of carrier, delivery date, consignee name, freight or express bill number, item
damaged and extent of damage.

Complete instructions regarding claim procedure are found in Section “S” of the Policy & Procedure Bulletins.

OMISSIONS & ERRORS

GE personnel, please use the GEMS CQA Process to report all omissions, errors, and defects in this documentation.
Customers, please contact your GE Sales or Service represenatives.

CAUTION

Do not use the following devices near this equipment. Use of these devices near this equipment could cause
this equipment to malfunction.

Devices not to be used near this equipment:

Devices which intrinsically transmit radio waves such as; cellular phone, radio transceiver, mobile radio transmitter,
radio–controlled toy, etc.

Keep power to these devices turned off when near this equipment.

Medical staff in charge of this equipment is required to instruct technicians, patients an        
  
 
         
     
 

d
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 3 2234976

REVISION HISTORY

REV DATE PRIMARY REASON FOR CHANGE


0 . . . . . . Jan. 6, 1999 ... Initial release.
1 . . . . . May. 28, 1999 ... Added V/R 4.02 software Loading
2 . . . . . Dec. 20, 1999 ... DAS Count
3 . . . . . . Dec. 8, 2003 ... Added: New FDD setting (JP, OC)

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

PAGE REV PAGE REV PAGE REV PAGE REV PAGE REV
Title page . . . . . . . . . 3 1–16 . . . . . . . . . . blank Tab 4 (Gantry) 2–1 to 2–11 . . . . . . . . 0 2–1 to 2–9 . . . . . . . . . 0
Title page rear . blank 2–1 to 2–35 . . . . . . . . 0 i.................. 0 2–12 . . . . . . . . . . blank 2–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
a to d . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2–36 to 2–37 . . . . . . 1 ii . . . . . . . . . . . . . blank 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2–11 to 2–12 . . . . . . . 0
A ................. 3 2–38 . . . . . . . . . . blank 1–1 to 1–2 . . . . . . . . . 0 3–2 . . . . . . . . . . . blank
B . . . . . . . . . . . . . blank 3–1 to 3–21 . . . . . . . . 0 2–1 to 2–14 . . . . . . . . 0 Tab 8 (Switch/Jumper
i.................. 0 3–22 . . . . . . . . . . blank 3–1 to 3–9 . . . . . . . . . 0 Tab 6 (DAS/Detector) Setting )
ii . . . . . . . . . . . . . blank 4–1 to 4–5 . . . . . . . . . 0 3–10 . . . . . . . . . . blank i.................. 0 i.................. 3
4–6 . . . . . . . . . . . blank 4–1 to 4–8 . . . . . . . . . 0 ii . . . . . . . . . . . . . blank ii . . . . . . . . . . . . . blank
Tab 1 (Introduction) 5–1 to 5–5 . . . . . . . . . 0 5–1 to 5–5 . . . . . . . . . 0 1–1 to 1–12 . . . . . . . . 0 1–1 to 1–49 . . . . . . . . 3
i.................. 0 5–6 . . . . . . . . . . . blank 5–6 . . . . . . . . . . . blank 2–1 to 2–3 . . . . . . . . . 0 2–1 to 2–4 . . . . . . . . . 0
ii . . . . . . . . . . . . . blank 5–7 to 12 . . . . . . . . . . 0 6–1 to 6–13 . . . . . . . . 0 2–4 . . . . . . . . . . . blank 3–1 to 3–2 . . . . . . . . . 0
1–1 to 1–3 . . . . . . . . . 0 6–14 . . . . . . . . . . blank 3–1 to 3–12 . . . . . . . . 0 4–1 to 4–6 . . . . . . . . . 0
1–4 . . . . . . . . . . . blank Tab 3 (OC)
i.................. 0 Tab 5 (Table) Tab 7 (XG) Tab APPENDIX
Tab 2 (System) ii . . . . . . . . . . . . . blank i.................. 0 i.................. 0 A–1 to A–4 . . . . . . . . 0
i.................. 1 1–1 to 1–8 . . . . . . . . . 0 ii . . . . . . . . . . . . . blank ii . . . . . . . . . . . . . blank
ii . . . . . . . . . . . . . blank 2–1 to 2–11 . . . . . . . . 0 1–1 to 1–7 . . . . . . . . . 0 1–1 to 1–23 . . . . . . . . 0
1–1 to 1–15 . . . . . . . . 0 2–12 . . . . . . . . . . blank 1–8 . . . . . . . . . . . blank 1–24 . . . . . . . . . . blank Blank/Rear cover . . . –

A
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
blank 2234976

B
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION (TAB 1)
General
SYSTEM (TAB 2)
Checks during System Installation
Software Loading
X–ray Alignment
System Calibration
Image Performance Verification
OPERATOR CONSOLE (TAB 3)
OC Components
OC Operation
GANTRY (TAB4)
DC Power Supplies
Gantry Mechanism
Rotational Operation
Tilt Operation
Collimator
Table and Gantry
TABLE (TAB5)
Elevation Function
Longitudinal Function
Table Accessories
DAS / DETECTOR (TAB6)
DAS Components
Detector Related Devices
DAS Operation
X–RAY GENERATOR (TAB7)
XG Components
Generator Output Check
SWITCH / JUMPER SETTING (TAB8)
Operator Console
Gantry
DAS
X–Ray Generator

i
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
blank 2234976

ii
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

INTRODUCTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION PAGE

SECTION 1 – GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1


1-1 GENERAL WARNING/CAUTION/NOTICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
1-1-1 Gantry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
1-1-2 Operator Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3

i INTRODUCTION
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
blank 2234976

ii INTRODUCTION
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

SECTION 1 – GENERAL

Use of This Manual


Use this ‘Functional Check/Adjustment’ for the following purposes:

D A during– and post–installation check to ensure that the entire system operates properly.

D As a reference source for Periodic Maintenance which mainly contains abbreviated lists.

D A post–FMI (Field Modification Instruction) check to verify system.

D A pre–diagnostic check to verify or determine failure symptoms before of during troubleshooting.

D A post–diagnostic check to verify system operation after repairs, before returning it to the customer to use.

1–1 INTRODUCTION
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-1 GENERAL WARNING/CAUTION/NOTICE

1-1-1 Gantry

WARNING!
ROTATION HAZARD !
TURN OFF THE ‘SCAN’ BREAKER LOCATED AT THE REAR OF THE GANTRY BASE BEFORE
INSERTING ANY OBJECT INTO OR WORKING ON THE GANTRY.

WARNING!
ROTATION HAZARD !
ALWAYS INSERT THE GANTRY AZIMUTH LOCK PIN BEFORE REPLACING THE TUBE, DAS
OR DETECTOR.

WARNING!
ELECTROCUTION !
DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT ON UNSHIELDED TERMINAL.

1–2 INTRODUCTION
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-1-2 Operator Console

WARNING!
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD !
DANGEROUS VOLTAGES EXIST ON EXPOSED SURFACES. USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN
WORKING ON LIVE EQUIPMENT.

CAUTION
Rotation Fan Assemblies !
Do not place any item into rotating blades. Use extra care when working near Fan assemblies.

NOTICE

Turn OFF power before removing or inserting any board of plug.

1–3 INTRODUCTION
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
blank 2234976

1–4 INTRODUCTION
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 1 2234976

SYSTEM

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION PAGE

SECTION 1 – CHECKS DURING SYSTEM INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1


1-1 CHECK PRIOR TO APPLYING POWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1-2 GROUND CONTINUITY CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4
1-3 TEMPERATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5
1-4 POWER LINE VOLTAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–6
1-5 LOAD DISTRIBUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–8
1-6 EMERGENCY OFF TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–10
1-7 FILTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–10
1-8 CUSTOM PARAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–10
1-9 X–RAY TUBE OVERHEAT SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–11
1-10 SCAN TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–12

SECTION 2 – SOFTWARE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1


2-1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2-2 FD FOR SYSTEM/OPTION SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2-3 PRE–ATINST PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5
2-4 ATINST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–11
2-5 POST–ATINST PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–17
2-5-1 Loading Version 3.02 System Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–25
2-5-2 Loading Version 4.00 System Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–27
2-5-3 Loading V/R 4.01 System Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–34
2-5-4 Loading V/R 4.02 System Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–36

SECTION 3 – X–RAY ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1


3-1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3-2 PLANE OF ROTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3
3-3 DETECTOR BEAM ON WINDOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6
3-4 GRAVITY SAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9
3-5 ISO CENTER ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–14
3-6 FILTER CENTER ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–18

SECTION 4 – SYSTEM CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1


4-1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4-2 CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2
4-3 CT NUMBER ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4

SECTION 5 – IMAGE PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1


5-1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5-2 IMAGE PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
5-3 QUALITY ASSURANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–5

i SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
blank 2234976

ii SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

SECTION 1 – CHECKS DURING SYSTEM INSTALLATION

1-1 CHECK PRIOR TO APPLYING POWER

CAUTION
Leave all power to the System OFF and tagged until power is called for in a specific step.

This section assumes all wiring and cabling is complete, equipment is installed, and that the following circuit breakers
and switches are OFF.
D BREAKER IN P.D.B (Power Distribution Box) for hospital supply

D 6 BREAKERS (CB 1 – 6) in XG cabinet

D 4 REAR BREAKER SWITCHES (SW 1 – 4) and 1 BREAKER (NFB) in Gantry


(NFB is only for System with Table P9155AF)
D SERVICE SWITCH in Gantry

D SYS–OFF–MNL SWITCH in Gantry


D 2 BREAKERS (NFB1, 2) in OC

Illustration 1–1 XG Cabinet

CB6

CB1∼CB5

TM1 TM2

1–1 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-1 CHECK PRIOR TO APPLYING POWER (continued)

Illustration 1–2 Gantry

Servo Amp

Sub Board
TGP Board

Service Switch
(SYS/OFF/MNL)

Service Switch

DANGER!!
FATAL COLLISION HAZARD!!
WHEN ‘CONTROL’ SWITCH LOCATED ON THE GANTRY REAR BASE IS
TURNED ON (WITH THE ‘SCAN’ SWITCH ON), THE GANTRY WILL ROTATE
DUE TO INITIALIZATION.

Note
The ‘Scan’ and ‘TBL/Tilt’ switches must be turned ON before turning ‘Control’ switch ON. The
switches turning ON sequence is as follows:
‘Scan’ ON ––> ‘TBL/Tilt’ ON ––> ‘Control’ ON

The ‘DAS/Det’ switch ca be turned ON any time.

1–2 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-1 CHECK PRIOR TO APPLYING POWER (continued)

Illustration 1–3 Operator Console

NFB1, NFB2

1–3 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-2 GROUND CONTINUITY CHECK


Verify that you removed the four(4) tilt lock plates and pulled out the Gantry azimuth lock pin.

1. Review illustration xxx, SYSTEM GROUNDING DIAGRAM schematics in the Installation Manual (P9018AS),
and check that all connections are mechanically secure at both ends.

2. Use a multimeter of equivalent device to measure the DC resistance between the following components in the
System, and verify that the resistance of each is less than 0.1Ω.

Ground specifications ≤ 0.1Ω.

Table 1–4 Ground Continuity Check

FROM TO Resistance
(Ω)
GND (PDB) GND (XG)
GND (XG) GND (GANTRY)
GND (GANTRY) GND (TABLE)
GND (XG) GND (OC)
GND (OC) GND (MT)*
GND (OC) GND (MFC)*
GND (OC) GND (OD)*
GND (OC) GND (Advantage Windows)*
Note: * indicates optional components.

1–4 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-3 TEMPERATURE
During the installation and start–up of the system you must take continuous temperature checks to make sure the
environment meets specifications listed in Section 3 of the Preinstallation manual (P9018AR). Excessive tempera-
ture, coupled with reduced air flow from clogged filters, may overstress components and cause failures.

Filters
Check and clean all electronic equipment dust filters. GE recommends initially doing this on a weekly basis, because
new installations always have dust and dirt present at this stage. Over a period of time, you may increase the mainte-
nance interval as site environment improves.

Specifications
During installation, use the temperature/humidity recorder and thermometer to record the temperature and relative
humidity in the scanner room. Make sure the data you collect meets the following temperature and humidity specifica-
tions.

D Scanner Room

– Temperature : 20°C ∼ 28°C

– Relative Humidity : 40% ∼ 70% (Non Condensing)

D Operator’s Room and/or Equipment Room

– Temperature : 15°C ∼ 30°C

– Relative Humidity : 20% ∼ 80% (Non Condensing)

Action
Contact the air conditioning supplier or your local GE service department when your data fails to meet any specifica-
tions.

1–5 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-4 POWER LINE VOLTAGE

Input Selection of 200V or 208V


Verify that the following connections in X–Ray Generator meet the input power voltage.

Illustration 1–5 Voltage Selection

For 200V System


TM3 TM4

200V C 208V 200V C 208V

For 208V System


TM3 TM4

200V C 208V 200V C 208V

1–6 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-4 POWER LINE VOLTAGE (continued)


The following assumes that the power source for the system was checked for mean voltage, as well as any line voltage
disturbance during preinstallation site checks.

Instrument
Use the same instrument (Dranetz, etc.) to monitor line voltage during this check that you used during the preinstalla-
tion check. The recommended line analyzer is the Dranetz Model 606–3 (3 channel) with the 101 frequency option,
or Dranetz Model line monitor plug in modules. You can use a similar analyzer, as long as it can monitor and report
mean voltage, surges, sags, short term impulses, and frequency drift.

Check Using an Instrument


Monitor the input power lines (200VAC or 208VAC) to the System at the System. Check in particular:

D Verify that the current line voltage equals the voltage measured during the preinstallation check.

D Verify that mean line voltage does not fall outside of equipment specifications during the day to day opera-
tion of other site equipment during the installation period.

D Look for any line voltage disturbances and check for a correlation between disturbances and system mal-
functions such as “Aborts” or component failures.

From the printouts, ensure that the power supply meets the following criteria :

D Line Voltage : 200VAC (50 Hz/60 Hz) (Normal Steady State)


208VAC (60 Hz) for U.S.A. (Normal Steady State)

D Daily Voltage Variation : +10% to –5% from nominal steady state (50Hz)
+6% to –9% from nominal steady state (60Hz)

D Frequency : 50Hz ± 0.5Hz, 60Hz ± 0.5Hz

Check Using an Oscilloscope


Monitor the power lines with an oscilloscope and verify that no significant distortion, noise or transients exist. Switch
between the oscilloscope’s long and short time base to monitor for spikes, as well as line drift over time. Generally,
harmonics of the third, seventh, and eleventh derivative will be the most prevalent.

Action
Investigate any condition that falls out of spec. Identify the problem source(s) and resolve the problem.

1–7 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-5 LOAD DISTRIBUTION


Before attempting this power application and functional check, make sure that the breakers and switches match the
instructions given in ‘Checks prior to Applying Power.’

WARNING!
ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD !!
DANGEROUS VOLTAGES EXIST WITHIN THE UNIT, USE EXTREME CARE TO AVOID INJURY
TO PERSONNEL AND EQUIPMENT.

Follow this procedure exactly in the order it was written. This procedure was developed with your safety in mind.
Follow this sequence to protect you and the equipment from irreparable damage.

1. Preparation

a. Remove the following covers:

D XG Covers (front and rear)


D OC Covers (front and rear)
D Table Bottom Cover
D Gantry Left side Cover

b. Verify again that all breakers and switches are OFF according to ‘Checks prior to Applying Power.’

c. Verify that wiring and cabling are correctly connected.

d. 
   

   

2. Switch ON the breaker on the power distribution box (hospital supply).

3. Measure 200 (or 208) VAC between terminals 1 and 2 (or 2 and 3) on TM1 on the XG.
It should be 200 (or 208) ± 20VAC.

4. Switch ON the ‘TRANS’ (CB1) breaker on the XG.

Verify that the ‘Power’ lamp in the front upper left corner of the XG turns ON.

5. Switch ON the ‘DAS’ (CB3) breaker on the XG.

6. Measure 100VAC between terminals 6 and 7 on TM2 on the XG. It should be 100 ± 10VAC.

7. Push the ‘Power’ switch on the OC.

Listen for the sound of contactor K1, K2 and K3 actuating in the XG. Check that the plunger indicators on K1,
K2 and K3 are pulled into the relay bodies.

1–8 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-5 LOAD DISTRIBUTION (continued)


8. Switch On the ‘OC’ (CB5), ‘TG115’ (CB4) and ‘TG200/208V’ (CB2) breakers on the XG, and check the following
voltages:

D 100 ± 10VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . between terminals 10 and 11 on TM1 (for OC)


D 115 ± 11.5VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . between terminals 4 and 5 on TM2 (for TG115V)
D 200 (or 208) ± 20VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . between terminals 1 and 2 (2 and 3) on TM2 (for TG200/208V)

9. Push the ‘Power’ switch on the OC. Verify that the K1, K2 and K3 are turned OFF.

DANGER!!
FATAL COLLISION HAZARD !!
WHEN BREAKERS LOCATED ON THE GANTRY REAR BASE ARE TURNED
ON, ALWAYS TURN THE SWITCHES ON IN THE FOLLOWING ORDER.

‘SCAN’ ON → ‘TABLE/TILT’ ON → ‘DAS/DET’ ON → ‘CONTROL’ ON


(CONTROL SWITCH MUST BE TURNED ON LASTLY.)

FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY LEAD TO GANTRY ROTATION AND


RESULT IN PERSONAL HARM, HARM TO OTHERS OR DEATH.

10. Switch ON all breakers and switches according to ‘Checks prior to Applying Power.’

DANGER!!
FATAL COLLISION HAZARD !!
VERIFY THAT NO PEOPLE ARE IN THE SCAN ROOM. THE GANTRY ROTATES
AUTOMATICALLY IMMEDIATELY AFTER THE OC POWER SWITCH IS
TURNED ON. WHEN THE GANTRY COVERS HAVE BEEN REMOVED, PEOPLE
CAN BE CAUGHT IN THE GANTRY. FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY
RESULT IN PERSONAL HARM, HARM TO OTHERS, OR DEATH.

11. Push the ‘Power’ switch on the OC.

Verify that the ‘OC Power’ lamp turns ON, and ‘System Preparation’ is displayed on the CRT monitor.

Verify that the 16 Fans rotate properly.

D Six(6) Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . upper rear part


D Nine(9) Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . bottom side of the nest chassis
D One(1) Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . behind power supplies

1–9 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-6 EMERGENCY OFF TEST


1. Press the emergency switch on the OC.

Verify that contactor K1, K3 and K4 in the XG turn OFF, and cut the power to the Table/Gantry (except DAS/De-
tector).

2. Press the ‘Power’ switch twice to reset emergency OFF, and re–apply power.

There are two emergency switches on the Gantry and one emergency switch on the XG. Perform this emergency
OFF test on each on the three emergency switches.

1-7 FILTER
There are on Filter in the OC and two in the XG.

D OC : Horizontal. one on the bottom of OC –– housed within a gold mesh filter enclosure.

D XG : Vertical, one each on the front and rear cover –– foam held in place by a white mesh enclosure.

1. Slide the filter at the bottom of the OC forward until it is removed from the OC.

2. Remove the front and rear covers of the XG and gentry pull the the foam out of each enclosure.

3. Suck up any dust on the filters with a vacuum cleaner.

4. Slide or fit each filter back into its enclosure.

1-8 CUSTOM PARAMETER


Run the Custom Parameter program to set the correct system configuration. You must also run this program any time
you change the system configuration (adding the option, etc.).

Refer to Functional Check/Adjustment manual, System, Section 2.

Note
No image data must exists on the system hard disk if you set or change the following parameters.

– Optical Disk Option

– Magnetic Tape Option

– Frequency

– Machine Number

– Hospital Name

Note
BOOT floppy must be in the floppy disk drive to change the parameters.

1–10 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-9 X–RAY TUBE OVERHEAT SAFETY


Check the overheat detection function by performing the following:

1. Switch OFF the ‘Scan’ switch at the Gantry rear base

2. Remove the both side covers from the Gantry.

3. Disconnect the rotor cable.

If the connector is not accessible, perform the following:

a. Set the Service switch to ON on the SUB Board.

b. Rotate the Gantry until the X–ray tube reaches the 3 o’clock position.

c. Set the Service switch to OFF.

4. Switch ON the ‘Scan’ switch.

5. Try to perform a scan.

Verify that a scan can not be performed and the “XG Fail” error message is reported on the status screen.

Verify that the ‘OH’ LED on the Power CONT Board in the XG is illuminated.

6. Switch OFF the ‘Scan’ switch.

7. Reconnect the connector.

1–11 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-10 SCAN TEST


This check assumes successful completion of all functional checks for XG, Gantry Table and OC. Check CT Sytec/Sy-
tec i series Operator Manual for scanning operation instructions.

DANGER!!
X–RAY EXPOSURE !!
IN THIS SECTION, THE X–RAY EXPOSURE IS PERFORMED. ALWAYS VERIFY
THAT NO PEOPLE IS IN THE SCAN ROOM WHENEVER SCAN IS PERFORMED.

Warm Up Scan
1. Make sure system power is ON an the ‘New Patiant’ and the ‘Warm UP’ arear are blinking on LCD screen.

Note
‘Warm Up’ should blink just after power up or system reset.

2. Make sure mothing is in the scan arear in the Gnatry room.

3. Touch the ‘Waum Up’ prompt to start the tube warm up program.

Make sure all warm up scans complete without error.

1–12 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-10 SCAN TEST (continued)

Scoutview Scan
4. Perform a series of scout scans to check scout scan operations:

Use the following scan parameters:

FOV : 42 cm
mA : 40, 60 or 80 mA
Tilt : 0°

a. Make sure that each scan is completed successfully.

b. Tilt the Gantry to any angle.

Make sure the software prohibits a scout scan with the Gantry tilted.

c. Release the ‘Scan ’ button during a scout scan.

Verify it aborts X–ray radiation, rotor rotation and cradle movement.

d. Select Auto Voice S1 and Auto Voice E1.


Lay the water phantom horizontally on the cradle.
Perform an AP (0°) scout scan on the phantom.

Make sure that you can hear and understand each voice.

Verify that the phantom diameter (In–Out direction) on the image is 266mm ± 3mm.

e. Select Auto Voice S2 and Auto Voice E1.


Set the QA phantom on the phantom holder.
Perform a LT (90°) scout scan on the phantom.

Make sure that you can hear and understand each voice.

Release the ‘Scan’ button before the whole image is displayed and verify that the scan continues.

Push the ‘Abort’ key and verify that the cradle and scan stop.

1–13 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-10 SCAN TEST (continued)

Localize
5. Perform a Localize function:

a. Display a scout image (use the image acquired at step 4).

b. Select the Localize function.

c. Prescribe and confirm an axial scan plan.

Make sure theat the ‘Table Set’ button blinks.

d. Press the ‘Table Set’ button.

Check that the cradle advances to the prescribed position.

Axial Scan
6. Perform an axial scan to check axial scan opreation:

Use the following scan parameters:

Interval : +10.0mm
Scan Time : 3.6 sec (CT Sytec 2000i, S)
2.7 sec (CT Sytec, 3000i)
1.8 sec (CT Sytec 4000i, Plus)

a. Select each of the Auto Voice messages (S1, S2, S3, S4, S5 or S6).

Verify that each scan completes with no error occurred.

Verify that you can hear and understand each voice.

Recon Time
7. Perform an axial scan using the following scan parameters:

Scan Time : 3.6 sec (CT Sytec 2000i, S)


2.7 sec (CT Sytec, 3000i)
1.8 sec (CT Sytec 4000i, Plus)
Scan FOV : 25 cm
Recon FOV : 25 cm
Recon Mode : STND
Anatomic Region : Head

Verify that the time between the scan end and the image appearance on the CRT monitor is within 15 sec.

1–14 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-10 SCAN TEST (continued)

KV and mA Meter
8. Perform a series of axial scans (mA : 40, 60, 80, 100, 130 and 160).

Verify that the KV meter on the XG read 120KV ± 3KV.


Also verify that the mA meter on the XG reads the expected value ± 5%.

Abort
9. Perform an axial scan and press the ‘Abort’ button before the scan completes.

Verify that the scan is terminated.

1–15 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
blank 2234976

1–16 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

SECTION 2 – SOFTWARE LOADING

2-1 GENERAL

NOTICE

Save existing patient data any time you perform the LFC procedure or you will lose this data.
The saving procedure is described in section 2-3 Pre–ATINST Procedure, Saving Customer
Data.

NOTICE

For DC–X, the system must be running on at least version 5.00 software. If the customer’s
DC–X system is older than version 5.00, perform FMI (FM91015 or 91016) must be performed
(version 5 upgrade) first.

This section describes the Load–From–Cold (LFC) procedure for a full system software loading from some FD (Floppy
Disk) to system hard disk. Perform this LFC procedure when:

D A failure or crash corrupts the hard disk so the existing software can not be used. A Load–From 0Cold
rebuilds the operating software on the disk and restores normal system operation.

D CT Engineering has revised the current software to incorporate improvements or correct existing prob-
lems. Replace the old software by performing a Load–From–Cold with the new software.

2–1 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-1 GENERAL (continued)

Illustration 2–1 Load–From–Cold Standard Procedure

Start

Save Customer Data

• ‘Acq Reverse’ Data


• Communication Data
• Ethernet Data
• Station Data
• Raw Data Files
• Patient Image Data – Start Study No.
• Error Message Help – Direction of Scout Image (Apex / Lateral)
• Record the Custom Parameters ––––– – Gantry Direction from Operator
Set CPW Boot Dip Switch
Insert Boot Floppy
Pull Reset Switch
ATINST Program

• Data File Save ––––––––––––––––––––– – Calibration Files


• Disk Initialize – Station No. Information
• Software Loading (Standard, Option) – Preset Patients Information
• File Allocation – Scan Parameter
• Data File Loading – System Parameters (Custom Parameters, etc...)
Starting Up System

• Remove Floppy Disk


• Reset CPW Dip Switch
• Pull Rest Switch
Restore Custom Parameters

• Including Additional Option Software Loading


• Custom Parameter Change
(It is necessary to manually restore the parameters due to a software bug.)
– Start Study No.
– Direction of Scout Image (Apex / Lateral)
– Gantry Direction from Operator
Restore Customer Data

• ‘Acq Reverse’ Data


• Communication Data
• Ethernet Data
• Station Data
• Raw Data Files
• Patient Image Data
• Error Message Help

End

2–2 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-2 FD FOR SYSTEM/OPTION SOFTWARE


Prepare the following, prior to starting the LFC procedure.

Table 2–1 System Software Diskettes

Volume Name Revision


BOOT 0
KEY0 1
LO00 2
LO10 3
LO20 2
LO21 2
LO30 3
LO31 2
LO40 2
LO41 2
LO42 2
LO43 3
HO00 4
CT00 3
CT10 2
VC00 2
TD00 3
OP00 0
OP01 0
OP02 0
OP03 0
OP04 0
PL00 (for CT Sytec 4000i, Plus) 4
ST00 (for CT Sytec, 3000i) 4
BS00 (for CT Sytec 2000i, S) 4
V400 (1/5 ∼ 5/5) 0
V400 (for CT Sytec 4000i, Plus) 0
V400 (for CT Sytec, 3000i) 0
V400 (CT Sytec 2000i, S) 0

2–3 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-2 FD FOR SYSTEM/OPTION SOFTWARE (continued)

Table 2–2 Option Software Diskettes

Volume Option or Standard


No
No. Rev
Rev. Name
Name Sytec 4000i, Plus Sytec, 3000i Sytec 2000i, S
1 PZ00 1 Pan / Zoom F F f
2 PG10 1 Paging F F f
3 CVRF 2 Curved Reformation F F f
4 RTRF 2 Real Time Reformation F F f
5 DIND 1 Display in Display F f f
6 DIM3 1 3D Imaging f f f
7 CD00 2 Coordinate f f f
8 DENT 2 Denta Scan f f f
9 ELNK 1 Ethernet Link f f f
10 INST 0 InSite f f f
11 BMD0 1 BMD f f f
12 CCI0 0 CCI f f f
13 FI00 0 Functional Image f f f
F : Standard : The system includes the software.
f : Option : The system does not include the software.

Normally, option software disks and also some application software disks included in the system software (‘PG00’
disk, ‘PZ00’ disk, ....) are not required in a version up or a re–loading procedure. However, these disks are required
if the ATINST program (described later) failed, or when the system hard disk drive is replaced with a new one.

2–4 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-3 PRE–ATINST PROCEDURE


Save Customer Data before proceeding. You must load Customer Data onto floppy diskette, tape or optical disk
cartridge because the LFC (Load–From Cold) procedure destroys any information on the system disk. Refer to the
Operator Manuals to complete the following steps.

Note
Alphanumeric letters you must enter at the keyboard are underlined. ‘CR’ means press the ‘Enter’.

1. Record ‘Acq Reverse’ user setting parameter.

a. After displaying an image on the CRT screen, write down ‘Acq Reverse’ data (ON or OFF) in ‘Set Display’
function.

Note
Usually the parameter setting data does not need to be recorded, since the data will be saved auto-
matically in the ATINST program (Data File Save Function). However, only ‘Acq Reverse’ data must
be recorded due to a software bug.

2. Save Communication Data.

For any system on which ELINK is installed, save Communication Data, Station No. and Ehternet Data on a
floppy disk. Otherwise, these data will be deleted during LFC.

a. Press the [Mgt] key.

D Select Communication Data Load/Save → Save

D Select Ethernet Data Handling → Save to FD

D Select Dump Parameters → Station Number Information File

Note
When saving all information above, use on floppy disk.

2–5 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-3 PRE–ATINST PROCEDURE (continued)

NOTICE

If you intend to save raw data on MOD, e sure to start with a blank cartridge, or one that does
not need to be preserved. This procedure erase all previous data contained on the MOD car-
tridge.

3. Save Raw Data Files:

Archive Raw Data Files to a MOD, floppy disks, tape, or optical disk if the customer wants to save them. Other-
wise, these files are destroyed during LFC.

Use the ‘Maintenance’ function to save the Raw Data as follows:

a. Select Support from the Maintenance menu.

b. Select FD Dump/Load, MT Dump/Load, or MOD Dump/Load.

c. Record the ID number of the Raw Data Files which you want to save.

d. Verify that the MOD should be set “write enable”.

e. Select Initialize to initialize the MOD.

f. Select Dump (Disk –> MOD).

g. Enter all the Raw Data File ID numbers. Then press the [End] key.

4. Save Patient Image Data:

Archive Patient Image Data to a MOD, floppy disks, tape, or optical disk if the customer wants to save them.
Otherwise, these files are destroyed during LFC. Use the ‘Image File Management’ function to save the Image
Data. (Refer to Operator Manual.)

5. Check if the service maintenance menu includes ‘Error Message Help’.

If the system contains ‘Error Message Help’ function, it must be reinstalled since version–up or reloading proce-
dures delete it.

2–6 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-3 PRE–ATINST PROCEDURE (continued)


6. Record Customer Parameters.

Note
Usually the Customer Parameter Data does not need to be recorded, since the data will be saved
automatically in the ATINST program (Data File Save Function). However, at least the following pa-
rameters must be recorded due to a software bug.

D Start Study No.


D Direction of Scout Image (Apex)
D Direction of Scout Image (Lateral)
D Gantry Direction from Operator

Note
Also, it is recommended to check which option software are currently installed on the system, so that
you can confirm later that those option software have been correctly retrieved. In addition, if you nave
all the records, they con serve as backup in the event there is trouble with the ATINST program.

a. Select Custom Parameters from the Maintenance menu.

b. Select Display Parameters.

Custom Parameters will be displayed one by one, as listed in Table 2–3. Use this table to record the parame-
ters.

Custom Parameters include Function Menu which noes not show in the Display Parameters mode.
Therefore, enter the Change Parameters mode and record the parameters in Table 2–4.

2–7 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-3 PRE–ATINST PROCEDURE (continued)

Table 2–3 Custom Parameters (Display)

Current Model Name


Auxiliary Unavailable . Available
Optical Disk Unavailable . Available
Magnetic Optical Disk Unavailable . Available
Magnetic Tape Unavailable . Available
Frequency 50 . 60
Machine No.
Hospital Name
Start Study No.
Disk Size

Direction of Scout Image


Apex Lateral
Kind of Base Picture Direction Kind of Base Picture Direction
Gantry . Head Upper . Lower Gantry . Head Upper . Lower
Gantry Direction from Operator Left . Right

Direction of Axial Image (from)


Head Top . Bottom Infant – Head Top . Bottom
Postfossa Top . Bottom Infant – Postfossa Top . Bottom
Neck Top . Bottom Infant – Neck Top . Bottom
Thorax Top . Bottom Infant – Thorax Top . Bottom
Abdomen Top . Bottom Infant – Abdomen Top . Bottom
Pelvis Top . Bottom Infant – Pelvis Top . Bottom
Extremities Top . Bottom Infant – Extremities Top . Bottom
Thickness 2/3mm 2mm . 3mm (see Note1)
Note1 : For Sytec 2000i and Sytec S system, this parameter is NOT displayed.

2–8 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-3 PRE–ATINST PROCEDURE (continued)

Table 2–3 Custom Parameters (Display) (continued)

Option
PAN & ZOOM Unavailable . Available
PAGING Unavailable . Available
3D IMAGING Unavailable . Available
REAL–TIME REFORMATION Unavailable . Available
CURVED REFORMATION Unavailable . Available
BMD Unavailable . Available
COORDINATE Unavailable . Available
CALCULATOR Unavailable . Available
DENTA Unavailable . Available
DISPLAY IN DISPLAY Unavailable . Available
NETWORK Unavailable . Available
SET LANGUAGE TYPE Unavailable . YMS E–LINK
INSITE English . French (see Note2)
No. of Raw Data
Note2 : This parameter is displayed at the system o version 3.01 or later.

Table 2–4 Custom Parameters (in Change Mode)

Function Menu
Auto Store Device Option OD . MT . MOD
OD Special Store Option NON . AUTO
Auto Delete Option ON . OFF
Min. Vacant Image Space for Scan
FD Packing Option DPCM . ORIGINAL
MT Packing Option DPCM . ORIGINAL
OD Packing Option DPCM . ORIGINAL
FD System No.
MT System No.
OD System No.
MT Image Max. No. 128 . 256 . 384 . 512 . 640 . 768
Device Type of Optional Disk OD . MOD (see Note3)
Note3 : This parameter appears only if both OD and MOD are installed.

2–9 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-3 PRE–ATINST PROCEDURE (continued)


7. Save data files (Preset Patient Information, Series Description, ....)

Note
Usually the sets of information below do not need to be saved since they will be automatically saved
in the ATINST program. However, if you save them, they can serve as backup in the event there is
trouble with the ATINST program.

D Preset Patient Information . . . . . . . . . . . Select Dump Parameters from the Management menu.
D Series Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select Dump Parameters from the Management menu.
D Calibration Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select Dump Parameters from the Management menu.
D Station No. Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select Dump Parameters from the Management menu.

Note
Do not save the System Parameter. If the backup system parameter will be restored after ATINST
has been retried, system might hang–up.

2–10 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
0REV 0 2234976

2-4 ATINST

Introduction
ATINST program performs the following operations on after another automatically. The program ATINST included in
BOOT floppy performs the most of the LFC procedures, as described below:

D Data File Save


The following data is automatically saved to the floppy disks. Prepare a few (1 ∼ 4) blank floppy diskettes
before starting ATINST.

– Calibration Files
– Station Number Information
– Preset Patient Information
– Series Description
– Scan Parameter
– System Parameters
Custom Parameters
Window / Level Key Settings
W/L Menu Settings
Set Display Settings
Image Sequence Settings

D Disk Initialize

D Software Loading (Standard, Option)


Additional option software will be installed during the ‘Restore Custom Parameters’ procedure.

D File Allocation
File Allocation create variable files for the system hard disk, such as image directory, calibration files and
image data files. If consists of two phases as follow:

– Variable File Allocation (VRALCT)


Create blank image file directory and blank calibration files.

– Image / Raw Data File Reserve (DFRSV)


Reserves contiguous sectors on the disk for image data and raw data.

D Data File Loading


The data stored on the FD at the first stage of the ATINST in automatically loaded to the hard disk.

2–11 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-4 ATINST (continued)

Failure Analysis of ATINST


Each of the ATINST operations are automatically called up after the previous procedure is finished. If an error seems
to have occurred while the ATINST program is running, check the following LED’s on the CPW board:

D Test LED : When Test LEDs lit in 7x(h), it indicates that the program is accessing the hard disk or floppy
diskette. It shows that the system is operating normally.

D Test LED : When Test LEDs lit in D0(h), it indicates that a bus error has occurred. (abnormal state)

D TALT LED : If lit, this LED indicates that the system operating system has terminated the current
command due to some error. (Abnormal state)

The following error could occur during the execution of the ATINST program:

D An error of the ATINST program itself (Program abort due to a program bug or hardware failure)

If either of the above error occur, the following menu will be displayed:

******************************* Displayed *******************************


Current Task Aborted Unexpectedly
File Name : xxxx (a program name to which an error is occurred)
1. Exit INSTALLATION
2. Retry Current Task
Select Menu No. =
************************************************************************
Menu 1 : Terminates the ATINST program.
Menu 2 : Retries the program in which the error occurred.

If problems are unable to be fixed, type “ATINST” to resume ATINST.

Retry of ATINST
After terminating the ATINST program by selecting ‘1’ in the menu, retry ATINST.

The ATINST program will start as ‘Reloading Mode’ or ‘First Loading Mode’, depending on when the program failed.
After the ATINST program is successfully finished, restore the following data files in that order, if they were saved.
Loading order is very important.

Calibration Files
Station Number Information
Preset Patient Information
Series Description
Scan Parameters
Option software which the customer’s system contains
InSite software (if system had)

2–12 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-4 ATINST (continued)

Operating ATINST
It will take approximately 40 minutes for the ATINST program to complete all its operation.

NOTICE

Save existing patient data any time you perform a LFC procedure or you will lose this data.
The saving procedure is described in ‘Pre–ATINST’ procedure.

Note
Prepare all of the floppy diskettes listed in Table 2–1 and Table 2–2 before starting this procedure.

1. Set the SW2 and SW4 of the “BOOT” switches on the CPW Board (Slot #1) to the ON option.

Illustration 2–2 Boot Switch Setting on CPW Board

ON

1 2 3 4

OFF

2. Insert the BOOT floppy into the disk drive.

3. Pull the reset switch located under the right side of the Operator Console.

The system is reset and “>” will appear on the monitor.

4. Start the ATINST program by entering ATINST:

******************************* Displayed *******************************


FHS ERROR C2
> ATINST ‘CR’
Delete IMAGE & RAW Data ? <0:OK, 1:Exit> = 0 ‘CR’
** INSTALLATION START **
Please Insert <<KEY0_[ x]>> FD and Press <ENTER>
************************************************************************

2–13 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-4 ATINST (continued)


5. Remove the BOOT floppy from the floppy drive and insert KEY0 floppy supplied with the system.

Press the <Enter> key.

******************************* Displayed *******************************

Please Insert FD for STORE and Press <ENTR>


************************************************************************
Note
Always use either blank floppies to store Data Files, or answer “Yes” to “Initialize OK ?” question when
prompted during STORE.

The following operations are carried out automatically in the order described:

D Saving Data files

D Disk Initialize

D Software Loading (Standard, Option)

D File Allocation

D Data File Loading

Note
If a non–initialize floppy diskette is inserted, it will be initialized automatically before saving data.

6. Save Data Files:


Remove the KEY0 diskette, then insert the scratch floppy diskette with No.1 written on it. You only have to change
the scratch floppy disks in order according to screen messages to save data onto these disks. Be sure to number
the floppies in the order used (1–4) for later reloading.

Note
If a non–initialize floppy diskette is inserted, it will be initialized automatically before saving data.

7. Initialize Hard Disk:


Remove the floppy diskette that data files are saved on and insert “BOOT” floppy diskette.

Press the <Enter> key. This starts VINIT program so that the hard disk will be initialized automatically.

******************************* Displayed *******************************


Please Insert <<BOOT>> FD and Press <ENTR>
** VNINTS Start **
What Device Name (4 Characters)? 463 MB Disk
.
.
.
** VINITs End
************************************************************************

2–14 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-4 ATINST (continued)


8. Software Loading (Standard, Option)
Remove the “BOOT” floppy diskette and insert the system floppy requests.

Press the <Enter> key. You only have to change the floppy disks to be loaded according to screen messages
until all the floppies are loaded.

******************************* Displayed *******************************


** FD Loading Start **
Please Insert <<xxxx_[ x]>> FD and Press <ENTR>

SELECT No. 1 2 3 4
1: COPY 2: COPY AND VERIFY
3: VERIFY 4: VERIFY WITH COMMENT
.
.
.
FD Loading End
************************************************************************

9. File Allocation
Inset the “BOOT” floppy diskette and press the <Enter> key.

This start the file allocation program so that the variable files are created automatically.

******************************* Displayed *******************************


** VR FILE ALLOCATION **
.
.
.
** VRALCT End **
** DFRSV Start **
.
.
** DFRRV End **
************************************************************************

2–15 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-4 ATINST (continued)


10. Data File Loading
Remove the “BOOT” floppy diskette and inset No.1 floppy diskette that includes the parameters saved during
“Saving Data files” procedures at the first stage of ATINST. Then press the <Enter> key.

11. Replace the No.1 floppy diskette with No.2 and press the <Enter> key according to screen messages. Repeat
this procedure until all parameters are loaded.

12. After all FDs have been loaded, press the <End> key to terminate the Data File Loading. Then the following
screen will appears.

******************************* Displayed *******************************


** INSTALLATION END **

*************************************************
* We will complete all works for installation *
* Put back the Dip Switch (1–4:OFF) *
* and pull the Rest Button. *
* Don’t Forget other operations as follows: *
* (*) Retrieve Image & Raw Data *
* (*) Change CUSTOM PARAMETER if necessary *
*************************************************
************************************************************************

ATINST First Loading Mode


If the ‘first Loading Mode’ is used as ATINST, you have to respond to inquiry during the ATINST operations, as de-
scribed below. This inquiries is on Model Name.

D Model Name:
Select the appropriate Model Name.
You will be instructed insert the ‘ST00’ or ‘BS00’ floppy.

2–16 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-5 POST–ATINST PROCEDURE

Starting Up System
1. Remove the floppy diskette that was used during data file loading.

2. Set all bits of the “BOOT” switches on the CPW Board to the OFF position.

3. Pull the system reset switch located under the right side of the Operator Console.

4. Check that the system status up normally and that the system version No. and loge appear on the CRT monitor.

Reinstall InSite Software


If the system contains the InSite system, restore the InSite software.

Note
The new INST floppy diskette must be prepared. Old software must not be reloaded.

Note
The system version 3 or later can not load InSite software using ‘Change Parameters’ mode of the
Customer Parameter. Also so not use TCOPY when loading it.

1. Enter the Management menu by pressing [Mgt] key.

2. Insert the BOOT floppy disk.

3. Enter $$ and “>” prompt will be displayed.

4. Remove the BOOT floppy diskette and insert the INST floppy diskette.

5. Enter the following at the “>” prompt:

******************************* Displayed *******************************


> FN INST:0.&.INSTINST.CF ‘CR’
> IC ‘CR’
************************************************************************

6. Pull the system reset switch located under the right side of the Operator Console.

7. Check that the system starts up normally.

2–17 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-5 POST–ATINST PROCEDURE (continued)

Restoring Custom Parameter


Use the CHANGE PARAMETERS function of the CUSTOM PARAMETERS program for the following purposes:
to change the custom parameters;
to load additional option software;
to change the number of raw data files.

Note
The custom parameter data will be restored automatically in the ATINST program (Data File Loading
Function). However, regarding the following, it is necessary to manually restore due to a software
bug:

– Start Study No.


– Direction of Scout Image (Apex)
– Direction of Scout Image (Lateral)
– Gantry direction from Operator

1. Insert the BOOT floppy into the disk drive.

2. Touch the [Maint] key and enter $$ to display the Maintenance menu.

3. Select Custom Parameters from Maintenance menu.

4. Select Change Parameters

Note
If a parameter is not required to be changed, press the [END] key to proceed to the next item.

Verify or change the custom parameters which are displayed one by one as listed Table 2–5.

When installing addition option software, the CUSTOM PARAMETER menu must be used. Note that software
can not be loaded using TCOPY.

5. Remove the BOOT floppy diskette.

6. Pull the system reset switch located under the right side of the Operator Console.

7. Check that the system start up normally.

8. Using ‘Display Parameter’ of the CUSTOM PARAMETERS menu, check if all the optional software you installed
are displayed as “Installed”.

2–18 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-5 POST–ATINST PROCEDURE (continued)

Table 2–5 Custom Parameters (Change Mode)

Set Model Name


Optical Disk
Magnetic Optical Disk
Magnetic Tape
Frequency
Machine No. This parameter does not appear if the hard disk contains images.
Hospital Name This parameter does not appear if the hard disk contains images.
Start Study No. see Note1
Scout Image Orientation see Note2
Gantry Direction from Operator see Note3
Axial Image Orientation (from) Press [END] to proceed to next item.
Function Menu see Note4
Thickness 2/3 mm see Note5
Option see Note6
InSite Password Password for InSite can be changed.
No. of Raw Data Files see Note7 This parameter does not appear if the hard disk contains images.

Note1 When ‘Start Study No.’ is automatically saved and loaded by ATINST, the original study number will be in-
creased by 1. So, enter the original No.

Note2 When ‘Scout Image Orientation’ is saved and loaded automatically. Using ATINST the default data will be
rewritten against the original data. The indication visible in the display might be the same as the original one, but data
has been rewritten. So, enter the original data recorded during ‘Pre–ATINST Procedure’ to New Data.

Note3 When ‘Gantry Direction from Operator’ is automatically saved and loaded by ATINST, the default data will
be rewritten against the original data. The indication visible in the display might be the same as the original one, but
data has been rewritten. So, enter the original data recorded during ‘Pre–ATINST Procedure’ to New Data. This pa-
rameter will not appear if ‘Gantry’ is selected as the kind of BASE IN SCOUT IMAGE ORIENTATION (Lateral).

2–19 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-5 POST–ATINST PROCEDURE (continued)


Note4 Function The following menu with the current settings is displayed:

******************************* Displayed *******************************


** FUNCTION MENU
CURRENT
1.AUTO STORE DEVICE OPTION = (OD or MT or MOD)
2.OD SPECIAL STORE OPTION = (NON or AUTO)
3.AUTO DELETE OPTION = (ON or OFF)
4.MIN VACANT IMAGE SPACE for SCAN = (XXXX)
5.FD PACKING OPTION = (DPCM or ORIGINAL)
6.MT PACKING OPTION = (DPCM or ORIGINAL)
7.OD PACKING OPTION = (DPCM or ORIGINAL)
8.FD SYSTEM No. = (XXXXXX)
9.MT SYSTEM No. = (XXXXXX)
10.OD SYSTEM No. = (XXXXXX)
11.MT IMAGE MAX No. = (XXX)
12.DEVICE TYPE OF OPTICAL DISK = (OD or MOD; This appears only if both
an OD and MOD are equipped in the
system)
Select No.=
************************************************************************

2. OD SPECIAL STORE OPTION AUTO: Images are automatically stored to the OD (AUTO STORE DEVICE),
when the number of vacant images on the system HD is decreased to below the number
(4. MIN VACANT IMAGE SPACE FOR SCAN).
3. AUTO DELETE OPTION ON: When the AUTO STORE function in enabled, studies which are already stored
(and not the retrieved ones) are automatically deleted from the HD to reserve the specified image space (4. MIN VA-
CANT IMAGE SPACE FOR SCAN). Delete operation is performed on files starting from the study having the smallest
study No. on the HD through to the study which will allow the specified space (4.MIN VACANT IMAGE FOR SCAN)
to be reserved.
4. MIN VACANT IMAGE SPACE FOR SCAN During an image retrieve operation. If the number of vacant images
on the HD becomes equal to this specified number, the retrieve operation is terminated and a “DK FULL” message
is displayed on the Status screen.

Note5 Thickness can be changed only for CT Sytec, 3000i, Plus, and 4000i. The default setting is “3”. If the system
is adjusted to 2mm, “2” must be selected.

Note6 Enter the appropriate No. of the option software you want to install. Repeat this procedure until all the soft-
ware options you want to install are loaded. The software options loaded will be indicated by “Installed”.

Note7 If the number of raw data files needs to be changed, select “0” and press the [ENTER] key. Then enter the
appropriate value in response to “Program Area”. It will take several minutes to complete data file reservation. If there
are many bad sectors on the disk, a “Too Many Bad Sector” message and the new appropriate (maximum possible)
number of Raw Data to be entered appears on the monitor. Enter the new number again if it is considered as appropri-
ate.

2–20 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-5 POST–ATINST PROCEDURE (continued)

Restoring Customer Data


1. Set ‘Acq Reverse’ user setting parameter.

a. After displaying an image on the CRT screen, set ‘Acq Reverse’ data (ON or OFF) in ‘Set Display’ function.

2. Restore ‘Communication Data’.

For any system on which ELINK is installed, restore Communication Data, Station No. and Ehternet Data from
the floppy disk.

a. Press [Mgt] key.

b. Select Communication Data Load/Save.

Note
The data has been saved using different menu in ‘Saving Customer Data’ procedure. However, in
version 3 system, you have only to restore them using ‘Communication Data Load/Save’ menu.

2–21 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-5 POST–ATINST PROCEDURE (continued)


3. Restore Raw Data.
If you saved raw data files prior to performing the ATINST procedure, restore them to the disk. Use Maintenance
function to retrieve raw data.

a. Insert the BOOT floppy into the disk drive.

b. Touch the [Maint] key and enter $$ to display the Maintenance menu.

c. Select SUPPORT from the Maintenance menu.

d. Select FD DUMP/LOAD, MT DUMP/LOAD, or MOD DUMP/LOAD.

(Example: Lading raw data files from MOD)

******************************* Displayed *******************************


** RAW DATA DUMP/LOAD (MOD) **
1.DUMP (DIDK –> MOD)
2.LOAD (MOD –> DISK)
3.DIRECTORY
4.INITIALIZE
Select No. = 2 ‘CR’
*** LOAD ( FROM MOD TO DISK ) ***
Volume Name = ORAW
Enter MOD START FILE No. = 0 ‘CR’ (Enter the first file No., stored in the MOD, from
which the raw data will be loaded onto the disk)
*** RAW DATA FILE SELECT ***
** FILE No. = 0
Enter SERIES No. = 1 ‘CR’
** FILE No. = 1
Enter SERIES No. = 2 ‘CR’
************************************************************************
The MOD raw data files will have the following ID No. on the disk.
0:0.XX.1;1 (STA:STD.SER.ACQ;IMG, digits other than the Series No. are fixed)
The file No. is updated and the system waits for enter of another file Series No.

Press [END] key, and the following message appears:

******************************* Displayed *******************************


Load Start OK? <0:OK, 1:NO> 0 ‘CR’
** LOAD START
** LOADED SERIES No. = 1
** LOADED SERIES No. = 2
.
.
** xx Files loaded **
************************************************************************

2–22 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-5 POST–ATINST PROCEDURE (continued)


4. Restore Patient Image Data.

If you archived patient image data prior to performing the ATINST procedure, restore it to the disk. Use Image
File Management function to retrieve it (refer to Operator manual).

5. Reinstall Error Help software (Class–C):

If the system contains ‘error Message Help’, reinstall the software since this version–up procedures delete it.

Note
The new EH00 floppy disk must be prepared. Old software must not be reloaded.

a. Enter the Management menu by pressing [Mgt] key.

b. Insert the BOOT floppy disk.

c. Enter $$ and “>” prompt will be displayed.

d. Remove the BOOT floppy diskette and insert the EH00 floppy diskette.

e. Enter the following at the “>” prompt:

******************************* Displayed *******************************


> FN EH00:0.&.EHINST.CF ‘CR’
> IC ‘CR’
> RT ‘CR’
************************************************************************

f. Remove the EH00 floppy diskette.

2–23 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-5 POST–ATINST PROCEDURE (continued)


6. Install Enhanced Service Toll software (Class–C) if possible:

a. Enter the Management menu by pressing [Mgt] key.

b. Insert the BOOT floppy disk.

c. Enter $$ and “>” prompt will be displayed.

d. Remove the BOOT floppy diskette and insert the SV00 floppy diskette.

e. Enter the following at the “>” prompt:

******************************* Displayed *******************************


> FN SV00:0.&.SV00INST.CF ‘CR’

> IC ‘CR’
> RT ‘CR’
************************************************************************

f. Remove the SV00 floppy diskette.

7. Pull the system reset switch located under the right side of the Operator console.

8. Check that the system starts up normally.

2–24 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-5 POST–ATINST PROCEDURE (continued)

2-5-1 Loading Version 3.02 System Software


1. Load the V302 floppy diskette:

a. Enter the Management menu by pressing [Mgt] key.

b. Insert the BOOT floppy disk.

c. Enter $$ and “>” prompt will be displayed.

d. Remove the BOOT floppy diskette and insert the V302 floppy diskette.

e. Enter the following at the “>” prompt:

******************************* Displayed *******************************


FHS ERROR C2
> FN V302:0.&.VRSET.LO ‘CR’
> RU
We are ready to Revision Up.
Please copy this FD, and run “Custom Parameters”, select “Change Parame-
ters”
> FN SYS:0.&.TCOPY.LO ‘CR’
> RU ‘CR’
.
.
SELECT No.= 2S ‘CR’
WHAT FILE NAME?
SOURCE: V302 ‘CR’
OBJECT: SYS ‘CR’
DO YOU WANT SELECT? N ‘CR’
IF FILE EXISTS, OVER WRITE OK? Y ‘CR’
COPY START!
.
.
TCOPY TERMINATED
> RT ‘CR’
************************************************************************

f. Remove the V302 floppy diskette.

g. Press [END] key to terminate the Management menu.

2–25 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-5 POST–ATINST PROCEDURE (continued)

2-5-1 Loading Version 3.02 System Software (continued)


2. Install the COORDINATE software. if possible:

Note
Though in ‘Restoring Custom Parameter’, the software above is installed, but they MUST be installed
again in this step.

a. Insert the BOOT floppy into the disk drive.

b. Touch the [Maint] key and enter $$ to display the Maintenance menu.

c. Select Custom Parameters from Maintenance menu.

d. Select Change Parameters

e. Press the [END] key to skip a menu and repeat this until ‘FD CONTENTS’ is displayed.

f. Remove the BOOT floppy diskette, and insert the CD00 floppy diskette.

g. Press the [END] key to skip a menu and repeat this until the Custom Parameter Change Mode is finished.

h. Remove the floppy diskette.

3. Pull the system reset switch located under the right side of the Operator Console.

4. Check that the system starts up normally and the “VER. 03.02” and logo appear on the CRT monitor.

2–26 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-5 POST–ATINST PROCEDURE (continued)

2-5-2 Loading Version 4.00 System Software

NOTICE

This software version–up is quite different from normal version–up. Do not pull ‘System
Rest’ until completion of the ‘Custom Parameter Change’ after copying the version 4.00 soft-
ware. Otherwise, the system will no longer starts up.

1. Verify that the system should be running on version 3.00 or later system software and the system has the Ether-
net option software, if not, perform the upgrade to version 3.00 and install the Ethernet option software.

2. Save System Parameter:

a. Insert the BOOT floppy into the disk drive.

b. Touch the [Maint] key and enter $$ to display the Maintenance menu.

c. Select System Parameter Dump/Load from the Maintenance menu.

d. Select System Parameter Dump.

e. Remove the BOOT floppy diskette and insert the first scratch floppy diskette.

After completion of ‘System Parameter Dump’, remove the scratch floppy diskette (label this floppy “System
Parameter”) and press the [Cancel] key to terminate the Maintenance menu.

3. Save Communication Data:

a. Before saving Communication Data, change ‘Interval Time’ of the ‘Auto Transmission’:

i. Press [Mgt] key to display the Management menu.

ii. Select Transmit Image from the Management menu.

iii. Select Auto Transmission, and change the value of ‘Interval Time’ to 20sec.

iv. Select Semiauto Transmission, and change the value of ‘Interval Time’ to 20sec.

v. Press the [END] key to skip a menu and repeat this until Management menu is displayed.

b. Insert a second scratch floppy diskette into the floppy disk drive.

c. Select Communication Data Load/Save from the Management menu.

d. Select Communication Data Save.

After completion of ‘Communication Data Save’, remove the scratch floppy diskette (label this floppy “Com-
munication Data”) and press the [END] key to skip a menu and repeat this until Management menu is dis-
played.

2–27 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-5 POST–ATINST PROCEDURE (continued)

2-5-2 Loading Version 4.00 System Software (continued)


4. Write down the installed option software:

a. Insert the BOOT floppy into the disk drive.

b. Touch the [Maint] key and enter $$ to display the Maintenance menu.

c. Select Custom Parameters from the Maintenance menu.

d. Select Display Parameters.

e. Press the [END] key to skip a menu and repeat this until ‘FD CONTENTS’ is displayed.

f. Write down the installed option software. Use the Table 2–6 to check and write down the site’s Custom Param-
eters.

Table 2–6 List of Option Software to Reinstall

Option Software Volume Name Check Item


Paging PG00 Installed . Not Installed
3D Imaging DIM3 Installed . Not Installed
Real–time Reformation RTRF Installed . Not Installed
Curved Reformation CVRF Installed . Not Installed
Coordinate CD00 Installed . Not Installed
Calculator CALC Installed . Not Installed
Network ELNK Installed . Not Installed
CBF CB00 Installed . Not Installed

g. Press the [Cancel] key to display the Maintenance menu.

2–28 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-5 POST–ATINST PROCEDURE (continued)

2-5-2 Loading Version 4.00 System Software (continued)


5. Load the V/R 4.00 system software:

NOTICE

This software version–up is quite different from normal version–up. Do not pull ‘System
Rest’ until completion of the ‘Custom Parameter Change’ after copying the version 4.00 soft-
ware. Otherwise, the system will no longer starts up.

Copy six(6) version 4.00 floppy diskettes (version 4.00 standard software: 2131960 floppy diskette 1/5∼5/5
and version 4.00 software for system grade: 2131963 floppy diskette 1/1) using TCOPY program.

a. Enter the Management menu by pressing [Mgt] key.

b. Insert the ‘BOOT–[0] V/R 3.xx’ floppy diskette.

c. Enter $$ and “>” prompt will be displayed.

d. Remove the BOOT floppy diskette, and at first, insert the version 4.00 standard software: 2131960 floppy
diskette 1/5.

e. Enter the following at the “>” prompt:

******************************* Displayed *******************************


FHS ERROR C2
> FN V400:0.&.VRSET.LO ‘CR’
V400:0000. .VRSET .LO(00,00)
> RU ‘CR’

We are ready to Version Up.


Please copy the FD, and run “Custom Parameters”, select “Change Parame-
ters”
VRSE: TERMINATED
************************************************************************

If the system version is not V3.00 or later, the following message is displayed.

System V/R # is not 3.00, so we can not continue Version Up!


Please Version Up to 3.00 first. Sorry !

If inserted floppy diskette is not V400–1/5, the following message is displayed.

LOAD ERROR 18000017

2–29 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-5 POST–ATINST PROCEDURE (continued)

2-5-2 Loading Version 4.00 System Software (continued)


f. Now copy each of the floppies of version 4.00 standard software: 2131960 floppy diskette 1/5∼5/5 using
the following commands:

******************************* Displayed *******************************


> FN SYS:0.&.TCOPY.LO ‘CR’
SYS:000. .TCOPY .LO (00,00)
> RU ‘CR’
SELECT No. 1 2 3 4
1: COPY 2:COPY AND VERIFY
3:VERIFY 4:VERIFY WITH COMMENT
** <OPTION> **
N:NON–WRITE TO MT HEADER (ONLY FOR MT I/O)
S:STOP ON VERIFY ERRORS (EXCEPT SELECT NO.1)
T:TERMINATE ON VERIFY ERROR (EXCEPT SELECT N0.1)
EXAMPLE: SELECT NO.= 2NS
SELECT NO. = 2S ‘CR’
WHAT FILE NAME
SOURCE : V400 ‘CR’
OBJECT : SYS ‘CR’
DO YOU WANT SELECT ? N ‘CR’
IF FILE EXISTS, OVERWRITE OK ? Y ‘CR’
.
.
.
TCOPY:TERMINATED
>
************************************************************************

g. After completion of loading version 4.00 standard software: 2131960 floppy diskette 1/5∼5/5, remove the
V400–5/5 floppy diskette.

h. Insert the following floppy diskette into the floppy disk drive.

FD Number Model Name


2131961 Sytec 2000i, S
2131962 Sytec, Sytec 3000i
2131963 Sytec 4000i, Plus

i. Type the same command as in step f. to copy all files on the floppy diskette to the system.

2–30 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-5 POST–ATINST PROCEDURE (continued)

2-5-2 Loading Version 4.00 System Software (continued)


j. After completion of TCOPY, enter RT to return of the Management menu, and press the [END] key to termi-
nate the Management menu.

k. Remove the floppy diskette.

NOTICE

Do not pull ‘SYSTEM RESET’. Otherwise, the system will no longer starts up. IN THIS CASE,
perform the procedure outlined below, and then, follows to next procedure ‘Reinstall Option
Software and Set the Multi language Function’.

i. Insert the ‘BOOT–[0] V/R 3.xx’ floppy diskette into the floppy disk drive.
ii. Set the SW2 and SW4 of the BOOT switches on the CPW Board to the ON position.
iii. Pull the reset switch located under the right side of the Operator console.
iv. Enter the following at the “>” prompt:
> FN SYS:0.&.TCOPY.LO ‘CR’
> RU ‘CR’
SELECT No. = 2S ‘CR’
WHAT FILE NAME ?
SOURCE : SYS:0.ELNKFMP. ‘CR’
OBJECT : SYS:0.FMP. ‘CR’
DO YOU WANT SELECT ? N ‘CR’
IF FILE EXISTS, OVERWRITE OK ? Y ‘CR’
v. Remove the ‘BOOT–[0] V/R 3.xx’ floppy diskette.
vi. Set all bits on the BOOT SELECT switch on the CPW Board to the OFF position.
vii. Pull the system reset switch.

2–31 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-5 POST–ATINST PROCEDURE (continued)

2-5-2 Loading Version 4.00 System Software (continued)


6. Reinstall Option Software and Set the Multi–Language Function:

Note
Although the ‘FD CONTENTS’ screen may show the options of Table 2–6 as Installed, you MUST
reinstall those Installed options to enable the new features contained in version 4.00 software.

a. Insert the ‘BOOT–[0] V/R 3.xx’ floppy into the disk drive.

b. Touch the [Maint] key and enter $$ to display the Maintenance menu.

c. Select Custom Parameters from the Maintenance menu.

d. Select Change Parameters.

e. Press the [END] key to skip a menu and repeat this until ‘FD CONTENTS’ is displayed.

f. Remove the BOOT floppy diskette.

g. Enter one option No. which was checked as ‘Installed’ in Table 2–6, and load the option software.

h. Load the other potions, which were checked as ‘Installed’ in Table 2–6, by repeating previous step.

i. Press the [END] key to skip a menu and repeat this until ‘SET LANGUAGE TYPE’ is displayed.

j. Enter the language number.

Note
On the Japanese system ‘Current Language = Japanese’ is displayed and this parameter can not
be changed. You have only to press [END] key to skip this setting. If the Japanese system must be
changed to English or French, delete all image in the hard disk first. The select “Sytec 4000i or Sytec
Plus” in ‘SET MODE NAME’ of change mode of the ‘CUSTOM PARAMETERS’. In the same way,
when changing English or French system to Japanese system, select “PreSage” after deleting all
images in the hard disk.

k. Press the [END] key to skip a menu and repeat this until the following message is displayed.

** CUSTOM PARAMETER END


*********************************
* PULL THE SYSTEM RESET BUTTON *
*********************************

l. Remove the floppy diskette, and pull the system reset switch located under the right side of Operator console.

m. Check that the system starts up normally, and version “4.00” and system logo appear on the CRT monitor.

2–32 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-5 POST–ATINST PROCEDURE (continued)

2-5-2 Loading Version 4.00 System Software (continued)


7. Restore Communication Data:

a. Press [Mgt] key to display the Management menu.

b. Insert the ‘BOOT–[0] V/R 3.xx’ floppy into the disk drive.

c. Select Communication Data Load/Save from the Management menu.

d. Remove the BOOT floppy diskette, and insert the second scratch floppy diskette saved ‘Communication
Data’.

e. Select Load from FD.

After completion of ‘Communication Data Load’, press [Cancel] key to terminate the Management program.

8. Restore System Parameters:

NOTICE

It takes approximately 5 minutes to load the FD. Do not misunderstand that status is ‘HUNG
UP’ or failed.

a. Insert the ‘BOOT–[0] V/R 3.xx’ floppy into the disk drive.

b. Touch the [Maint] key and enter $$ to display the Maintenance menu.

c. Select System Parameter Dump/Load from the Maintenance menu.

d. Select Parameter Load from FD.

e. Remove the BOOT floppy diskette, and insert the first scratch floppy diskette saved ‘System Parameters’.

After completion of ‘System Parameter Load’, press [Cancel] key to terminate the Maintenance menu.

f. Remove the floppy diskette, and pull the system reset switch located under the right side of Operator console.

g. Check that the system starts up normally, and version “VER. 4.00” and system logo appear on the CRT moni-
tor.

2–33 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-5 POST–ATINST PROCEDURE (continued)

2-5-3 Loading V/R 4.01 System Software

NOTICE

The CT Sytec / Sytec i series system must running on V/R 4.00.

Copy one(1) version 4.01 floppy diskette (version 4.01 standard software: 2144661 floppy diskette 1/1) using TCOPY
program.

Note
This version–up is OVERWRITE software type.

1. Enter the Management menu by pressing [Mgt] key.

2. Insert the ‘BOOT–[0] V/R 3.xx’ floppy diskette.

3. Enter $$ and “>” prompt will be displayed.

4. Remove the BOOT floppy diskette, and insert the version 4.01 standard software: 2144661 floppy diskette
1/1.

5. Enter the following at the “>” prompt:

******************************* Displayed *******************************


FHS ERROR C2
> FN V401:0.&.VRSET.LO ‘CR’
V401:0000. .VRSET .LO(00,00)
> RU ‘CR’
We are ready to Version Up.
Please copy the FD, and Rest/Start !
VRSE: TERMINATED
************************************************************************

If the system version is not V4.00, the following message is displayed.

******************************* Displayed *******************************


System V/R # is not 4.00, so we can not continue Revision Up!
Please Version Up to 4.00 first, Sorry !
************************************************************************

2–34 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-5 POST–ATINST PROCEDURE (continued)

2-5-3 Loading V/R 4.01 System Software (continued)


6. Now copy the version 4.01 standard software: 2144661 floppy diskette 1/1 using the following commands:

******************************* Displayed *******************************


> FN SYS:0.&.TCOPY.LO ‘CR’
SYS:000. .TCOPY .LO (00,00)
> RU ‘CR’
SELECT No. 1 2 3 4
1: COPY 2:COPY AND VERIFY
3:VERIFY 4:VERIFY WITH COMMENT
** <OPTION> **
N:NON–WRITE TO MT HEADER (ONLY FOR MT I/O)
S:STOP ON VERIFY ERRORS (EXCEPT SELECT NO.1)
T:TERMINATE ON VERIFY ERROR (EXCEPT SELECT N0.1)
EXAMPLE: SELECT NO.= 2NS
SELECT NO. = 2S ‘CR’
WHAT FILE NAME
SOURCE : V401 ‘CR’
OBJECT : SYS ‘CR’
DO YOU WANT SELECT ? N ‘CR’
IF FILE EXISTS, OVERWRITE OK ? Y ‘CR’
.
.
.
TCOPY:TERMINATED
>
************************************************************************

7. After completion of loading version 4.01 standard software: 2144661 floppy diskette 1/1, enter RT to return
of the Management menu, and press the [END] key to terminate the Management menu.

8. Remove the floppy diskette, and pull the system reset switch located under the right side of Operator console.

9. Check that the system starts up normally, and version “VER. 4.01” and system logo appear on the CRT monitor.

2–35 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 1 2234976

2-5 POST–ATINST PROCEDURE (continued)

2-5-4 Loading V/R 4.02 System Software

NOTICE

The CT Sytec / Sytec i series system must running on V/R 4.01.

Copy one(1) version 4.02 floppy diskette (version 4.02 standard software: 2236432 floppy diskette 1/1) using TCOPY
program.

Note
This version–up is OVERWRITE software type.

1. Enter the Management menu by pressing [Mgt] key.

2. Insert the ‘BOOT–[0] V/R 3.xx’ floppy diskette.

3. Enter $$ and “>” prompt will be displayed.

4. Remove the BOOT floppy diskette, and insert the version 4.02 standard software: 2236432 floppy diskette
1/1.

5. Enter the following at the “>” prompt:

FHS ERROR C2
> FN V402:0.&.VRSET.LO ‘CR’
V402:0000. .VRSET .LO(00,00)
> RU ‘CR’
We are ready to Version Up.
Please copy the FD, and Rest/Start !

VRSE: TERMINATED

If the system version is not V4.01, the following message is displayed.

System V/R # is not 4.01, so we can not continue Revision Up!


Please Version Up to 4.01 first, Sorry !

2–36 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 1 2234976

2-5-4 Loading V/R 4.02 System Software (continued)


6. Now copy the version 4.02 standard software: 2236432 floppy diskette 1/1 using the following commands:

> FN SYS:0.&.TCOPY.LO ‘CR’


SYS:000. .TCOPY .LO (00,00)
> RU ‘CR’
SELECT No. 1 2 3 4
1: COPY 2:COPY AND VERIFY
3:VERIFY 4:VERIFY WITH COMMENT
** <OPTION> **
N:NON–WRITE TO MT HEADER (ONLY FOR MT I/O)
S:STOP ON VERIFY ERRORS (EXCEPT SELECT NO.1)
T:TERMINATE ON VERIFY ERROR (EXCEPT SELECT N0.1)
EXAMPLE: SELECT NO.= 2NS
SELECT NO. = 2S ‘CR’
WHAT FILE NAME
SOURCE : V402 ‘CR’
OBJECT : SYS ‘CR’
DO YOU WANT SELECT ? N ‘CR’
IF FILE EXISTS, OVERWRITE OK ? Y ‘CR’
.
.
.
TCOPY:TERMINATED
>

7. After completion of loading version 4.02 standard software: 2236432 floppy diskette 1/1, enter RT to return
of the Management menu, and press the [END] key to terminate the Management menu.

8. Remove the floppy diskette, and pull the system reset switch located under the right side of Operator console.

9. Check that the system starts up normally, and version “VER. 4.02” and system logo appear on the CRT monitor.

2–37 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
blank 2234976

2–38 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

SECTION 3 – X–RAY ALIGNMENT

WARNING!
ROTATION HAZARD !
IN THIS ‘X–RAY ALIGNMENT’, GANTRY COMPONENTS ARE ADJUSTED AND SCANS ARE
PERFORMED. ALWAYS SWITCH OFF THE ‘SCAN’ SWITCH BEFORE SERVICING OR
ADJUSTING THE GANTRY. ALSO VERIFY THAT NO PEOPLE ARE IN THE SCAN ROOM
WHENEVER A SCAN IS PERFORMED.

3-1 GENERAL
This ‘X–Ray Alignment’ consists of the following check/adjustment procedures:

Plane of Rotation
Detector Beam–On–Window
Gravity SAG
Iso Center Alignment
Filter Center Alignment

Perform these procedures in the following order:


Plane of Rotation → Detector Beam–On–Window → (Gravity SAG) → Iso Center Alignment
→ Filter Center Alignment

The ‘Gravity SAG’ procedure is a check procedure for the Gantry rotating mechanism (bend, vibrations, etc.).
Perform this check if considered necessary.

3–1 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

3-1 GENERAL (continued)

Requirements
The critical components for X–Ray Alignment are all mounted directly to the rotating Gantry; they are:

D X–Ray Tube

D Collimator (includes a bow–tie filter and an adjustable beam defining exit slit)

D Detector

Tools and materials required for X–Ray alignment:

D Polaroid Type 52 Film Packs

D Polaroid Type 45 Film Holder (developer for type 52 film)

D Film Holder (Z9807NA and Z9807NB) for Detector Beam–On–Window alignment

D G–SAG Pin (Z9807NH)

Gantry Geometry

Theta : Tangent to Gantry rotation.


clockwise (+)
counterclockwise (–) (–) (+)
Z–Axis : Parallel to the axis of Gantry rotation. (+)
toward the Table (–)
away from the Table (+)

Note: (–)
D The tube unit can be adjusted in both the theta and
the Z direction.
D The bow–tie filter in the collimator can be adjusted
only in the theta direction.
D The detector can be adjusted only in the Z direction.

Polaroid Film Use


Use a Polaroid Film pack, a Polaroid film holder or squeeze roller for development as follows:

1. Develop a Polaroid film pack with the film holder.

2. Break the chemical pod over a table edge, or use a squeeze roller ad follows:

a. Apply heavy pressure to break the pod, and ease up slightly to spread the developer evenly ever the film.

3–2 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

3-2 PLANE OF ROTATION


This procedure checks and adjusts the plane of rotation of the X–Ray fan beam until it is perpendicular to the axis
of Gantry rotation to within ± 0.75 mm across the largest Gantry aperture (63 cm).

1. Switch OFF the ‘Scan’ and ‘TBL/Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.

2. Remove the front and both side Gantry covers.

3. Verify that the bow–tie filter is in the collimator.

4. Attach a Polaroid film at the Gantry 0 deg. position using adhesive tape (the side of the film marked “THIS SIDE
TOWARD LEDS” should face the Gantry rear cover).

Note
The position of the film within the scan circle is critical for accurate results during this check/adjust-
ment procedure.
If front and rear Gantry covers are removed, use the 42 cm PP phantom as follows
a. Raise the Table to its highest position.
b. Set the 42cm PP phantom to the phantom holder.
c. Attach the edge of the ‘Type 52’ film onto top part of the circumference of the phantom.
d. Move the cradle until the center to the film reaches under the collimator slit.

Mark a ‘T’ on the film to identify the Table side.

5. Switch ON the ‘Scan’ and ‘TBL/Tilt’ switches.

6. Perform an axial scan with the following parameters:

Scan Time : 3.6 sec (CT Sytec 2000i, S)


: 4.5 sec (CT Sytec, 3000i, 4000i, Plus)
Thickness : 10 mm
KV : 120 KV
mA : 40 mA

Remove the film pack.

Develop the film. Wait the required film development time described on the film pack.

3–3 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

3-2 PLANE OF ROTATION (continued)


7. Check if the narrow exposure lies within the wider exposure, and the center lines of the two beams coincide within
0.75 mm.

XF–XR
2 ≤ 0.75 mm –––> proceed to step 9.

XF–XR
2 > 0.75 mm –––> proceed to the next step 8.

Where XF : the front width not covered by the narrow beam


XR: the rear width not covered by the narrow beam

Illustration 3–1 Narrow and Wide Exposure

XR
TABLE GANTRY
XF

Measure XF–XR
2

Narrow Beam
(Tube at the HOME position) Wide Beam
(Tube at 180 deg. position)

3–4 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

3-2 PLANE OF ROTATION (continued)


8. Adjust the X–Ray tube Z–axis position:

a. Rotate the Gantry until the X–Ray tube reaches the HOME position.

b. Switch OFF the ‘Scan’ and ‘TBL/Tilt’ switches.

c. Loosen the 4 mounting bolts.

d. Locate the Adjustment Nuts for Z–Axis; note that there are two Z–Axis nuts for adjustment.

e. Loosen the nut that faces the direction in which you want to shift the tube.

1
f. Turn the other nut in the direction in which you want to shift the tube (the required tube shift is 7 XF–XR ).

Note
D One turn of the nut results in approximately 1mm on tube movement.
D Use the micro dial gauge to help you adjusting the tube.

g. Tighten the nut previously loosened in step e.

h. Tighten the 4 mounting bolts.

i. Switch ON the ‘Scan’ and ‘TBL/Tilt’

j. Return to step 4.

9. Proceed to Section 3-3 ‘Detector Beam–On–Window’.

Illustration 3–2 X–Ray Tube Positioning

Mounting Plate
Mounting Bolts
(Socket Head)

Table Gantry
Cathode

Anode

Adjustment Nut
for Z–Axis

Mounting Bolts Adjustment Nut


(Socket Head) for Theta

3–5 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

3-3 DETECTOR BEAM ON WINDOW


To ensure the entire width of the X–Ray beam falls within the detector window, follow this procedure for a Z–Axis posi-
tion check/adjustment of the detector.

1. Preparation:

You do not have to perform the following, if you have just completed the ‘Plane of Rotation’ procedure.

a. Switch OFF the ‘Scan’ and ‘TBL/Tile’ switches at Gantry rear base.

b. Remove the front and both side Gantry covers.

c. Remove the bow–tie filter from the collimator (refer to the Component Replacement manual).

d. Switch ON the ‘Scan’ and ‘TBL/Tilt’ switches.

2. Set the film holders with Polaroid film to the Detector:

a. Switch OFF the ‘Scan’ switch.

b. Insert a Polaroid film to the two film holders with the side marked “THIS SIDE TOWARD LENS” facing down
and the “INSERT THIS END” forward the Gantry when placed on the Detector.

Make sure that the films are fully inserted into the holders, otherwise you may lose part of the image. One film
holder is for the right side of the Detector, and the other is for the left side.

Note
Each film holder has a side tab to position it to the window slot of the Detector, and two end tabs
to align it to the end of the Detector housing. A cutout in the front of the holder provides reference
marks on the exposed film relating the center line of the Detector window and the X–Ray beam Z–
Axis position.

c. Mount the two film holders with film onto both ends of the Detector.

d. Switch ON the ‘Scan’ switch.

Illustration 3–3 Film Holder Placement

ÂÂÂÂÂ ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂ ÂÂÂÂ
Film
ÂÂÂÂÂ ÂÂÂÂ
Film

3–6 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

3-3 DETECTOR BEAM ON WINDOW (continued)


3. Perform a stationary scan on the films:

a. Insert the BOOT floppy into the disk drive.

b. Touch the [Maint] key and enter $$ to display the Maintenance menu.

c. Select SUPPORT from the Maintenance menu.

d. Select OFF LINE SCAN from the Support menu.

e. In this menu, perform the following stationary scan:

Azimuth : Present Degree


Scan Time : 3.6 sec (CT Sytec 2000i, S)
4.5 sec (CT Sytec 3000i, 4000i, Plus)
Thickness : 10 mm
KV : 120 KV
mA : 80 mA
(Others) : (defaults)

f. Switch OFF the ‘Scan’ switch.

g. Remove the films, and develop the films. (Wait the required film development time described on the film pace.

h. Mark ‘ch1’ or ‘ch635’ and ‘Table’ or ‘Gantry’ on the film as appropriate.

i. Switch ON the ‘Scan’ switch.

4. Examine the films for axial centering of the X–Ray beam to the center line of the Detector window:

See illustration 3–4. You should see both the top and bottom edges of x–ray. The edges should be well defined.

Illustration 3–4 Beam–On–Window Exposure

LEFT RIGHT
H635

H1
Xw

Measure if the x–ray beam centering falls within the following values:

Xw Xw
– H1 ≤ 1 mm – H635 ≤ 1 mm H1 – H635 ≤ 1 mm
2 2

If these are not met, perform step 5. If these are met, proceed to step 6.

3–7 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

3-3 DETECTOR BEAM ON WINDOW (continued)


5. Adjust the Detector Z–Axis position:

a. Switch OFF the ‘Scan’ switch.

b. Locate the Detector mounting/adjustment points (see illustration ).


Each mounting location has an adjustment nut for shifting the Detector along the Z–Axis.

c. Loosen the (Allen cap head) locking screw.

d. Turn the Z–Axis adjustment nut in the direction you want to shift the Detector (i.e., toward Table or toward
Gantry) and over the distance required to meet specification using vernier calipers to measure Z–Axis sift
measured in step 4.

One Turn : approximately 1mm shift.

e. Tighten the locking screw to lock the Detector into position.

f. Make this adjustment at each of the 4 mounting locations. The measurement for all 4 locations should be the
same.

g. Switch ON the ‘Scan’ switch.

h. Return to step 2.

6. Proceed to the ‘Gravity SAG’ or ‘Iso Center Alignment’ procedure.

Illustration 3–5 Beam–On–Window Adjustment

Detector Support
Plate Use Vernier Calipers

Shock
Mount
Detector
Z–Axis Locking Screw
Adjustment Nut (Allen Head)

3–8 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

3-4 GRAVITY SAG


1. Preparation:

You do not have to perform the following, if you have just completed the ‘Beam–On–Window’ procedure.

a. Switch OFF the ‘Scan’ and ‘TBL/Tile’ switches at Gantry rear base.

b. Remove the front and both side Gantry covers.

c. Remove the bow–tie filter from the collimator (refer to the Component Replacement manual).

d. Switch ON the ‘Scan’ and ‘TBL/Tilt’ switches.

2. Perform an axial scan:

a. Insert the BOOT floppy into the disk drive.

b. Touch the [Maint] key and enter $$ to display the Maintenance menu.

c. Select SUPPORT from the Maintenance menu.

d. Select OFF LINE SCAN from the Support menu.

e. Perform the following air axial scan:

Scan Time : 3.6 sec (CT Sytec 2000i, S)


2.7 sec (CT Sytec, 3000i)
1.8 sec (CT Sytec 4000i, Plus)
CW/CCW : CW
Thickness : 10 mm
KV : 120 KV
mA : 40 mA
(Others) : (defaults)

Series No. : 1

3–9 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

3-4 GRAVITY SAG (continued)


3. Install the G–SAG Pin:

a. Switch OFF the ‘Scan’ and ‘TBL/Tile’ switches at Gantry rear base.

b. Attach the G–SAG Pin with adhesive tape (see illustration 3–6).

c. Switch ON the ‘Scan’ and ‘TBL/Tile’ switches.

4. Perform the following pin scan:

Scan Time : 3.6 sec (CT Sytec 2000i, S)


2.7 sec (CT Sytec, 3000i)
1.8 sec (CT Sytec 4000i, Plus)
CW/CCW : CW
Thickness : 10 mm
KV : 120 KV
mA : 40 mA
(Others) : (defaults)

Series No. : 2

Illustration 3–6 Installing G–SAG Pin

G–SAG Pin

Collimator

3–10 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

3-4 GRAVITY SAG (continued)


5. Store the Gravity SAG data into mean file:

a. Select Alignment from the Support menu.

b. Select Gravity SAG Amplitude from the Alignment menu.

c. Enter the raw data file Nos previously acquired, as follows:

******************************* Displayed *******************************


** GRAVITY SAG AMPLITUDE **
RAW DATA FILE (AIR)
Enter ID No. = 1 ‘CR’

RAW DATA FILE (POC)


Enter ID No. = 2 ‘CR’
The computer starts calculation, and then displays the following:
** START
CENTER CH. = xxx.xxx
AVERAGE CH. = xxx.xxx
************************************************************************

d. Write down the ‘AVERAGE CH.’ data

e. Select STORE FILE.

f. Enter 1 as the MEAN FILE No.

g. Press the [END] key to return to the Maintenance menu.

3–11 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

3-4 GRAVITY SAG (continued)


6. Check the Gravity SAG data using SUPPORT DISPLAY.

a. Select SUPPORT DISPLAY from the Maintenance menu.

b. Select FILE SELECTION.


Enter M for FILE NAME.
Enter 0 for MIN.
Enter 1 for MAX.

c. Select SET CURSOR.


Enter 1 for CHANNEL.
Enter 1 for DATA. (The No.1 mean file is located on the first line.)

d. Select PROFILE (H).


Enter a value (= XXX – 0.5) for DATA MIN.
Enter a value (= XXX + 0.5) for DATA MAX. (XXX was written down at step 5.d.)

The sine shaped wave as shown the illustration is displayed on the CRT.

e. Press [Crsr] and [j/f] keys to display the rectangular cursor.

f. Press [Size] key and adjust the vertical length of the cursor to 0.4 channels.

g. Verify visually that α is within the 0.4 channels rectangle (see illustration 3–7).

h. Press [Size] key and adjust the vertical length of the cursor to 0.7 channels.

i. Verify visually that β is within the 0.7 channels rectangle (see illustration 3–7).

j. Perform the steps below to show a graph for channels beyond 500.

i. Press the [END] key.

ii. Select ERASE from the Display Support menu.

iii. Select START POSITION.


Enter 300 for CHANNEL.
Enter 1 for DATA.

iv. Select SET CURSOR.


Enter 300 for CHANNEL.
Enter 1 for DATA.

v. Repeat steps d. through i.

7. If the Gravity SAG data is out of specifications, verify that the Detector mounting bolts and X–ray tube mounting
bolts are correctly torqued, and then perform this ‘Gravity SAG’ procedure again.

8. Remove the G–SAG Pin.

3–12 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

3-4 GRAVITY SAG (continued)

Illustration 3–7 G–SAG Curve

306.800

306.600

α
306.400 0.4 Channel

306.200

306.000

100.000 200.000 300.000 400.000

306.800

306.600

β
306.400 0.7 Channel

306.200

306.000

100.000 200.000 300.000 400.000

3–13 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

3-5 ISO CENTER ALIGNMENT


This ‘ISO Center Alignment’ aligns the X–Ray Tube focus to the FOV center and Detector center channel.

Illustration 3–8 ISO Center Alignment

Adjust

X–ray
Tube
Focus

Center of FOV

CH1
Detector

Center Channel:
317.75 ± 0.02 CH

1. Preparation

You do not have to perform the following, if you have just completed the ‘Beam–On–Window’ procedure.

a. Switch OFF the ‘Scan’ and ‘TBL/Tile’ switches at Gantry rear base.

b. Remove the front and both side Gantry covers.

c. Remove the bow–tie filter from the collimator (refer to the Component Replacement manual).

d. Switch ON the ‘Scan’ and ‘TBL/Tilt’ switches.

3–14 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

3-5 ISO CENTER ALIGNMENT (continued)


2. Perform an axial scan:

a. Insert the BOOT floppy into the disk drive.

b. Touch the [Maint] key and enter $$ to display the Maintenance menu.

c. Select SUPPORT from the Maintenance menu.

d. Select OFF LINE SCAN from the Support menu.

e. Perform the following air axial scan:

Scan Time : 3.6 sec (CT Sytec 2000i, S)


2.7 sec (CT Sytec, 3000i)
1.8 sec (CT Sytec 4000i, Plus)
CW/CCW : CW
Thickness : 10 mm
KV : 120 KV
mA : 40 mA
(Others) : (defaults)

Series No. : 3

3. Attach a steel pin, approximately 6mm in diameter, (ex. screw driver) to the phantom holder at a position approxi-
mately 5cm away from the scan axis center, as shown in illustration 3–9.

Illustration 3–9 Pin Scan

Center of Scan Plane

Approx. 5cm
Off Center

Phantom Holder

3–15 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

3-5 ISO CENTER ALIGNMENT (continued)


4. Perform the following pin axial scan:

Scan Time : 3.6 sec (CT Sytec 2000i, S)


2.7 sec (CT Sytec, 3000i)
1.8 sec (CT Sytec 4000i, Plus)
CW/CCW : CW
Thickness : 10 mm
KV : 120 KV
mA : 40 mA
(Others) : (defaults)

Series No. : 4

5. Press the [END] key to skip a menu and repeat this until ‘Support Menu’ is displayed.

6. Check that the calculated Iso Center Channel data is within a specification:

a. Select ALIGNMENT from the Support menu.

b. Select ISO CENTER CHANNEL.

c. Enter the raw data file Nos. previously acquired, as follows:

******************************* Displayed *******************************


** ISO CENTER CHANNEL **
RAW DATA FILE (AIR)
Enter ID No. = 3 ‘CR’
RAW DATA FILE (PIN)
Enter ID No. = 4 ‘CR’
** START The computer starts calculation, and then displays following:
ISO AVERAGE CH. = xxx.xxx (317.75±0.02)
MOVE TUBE x.xxx mm

************************************************************************

If the value is 317.75 ± 0.02, go to step 8.


If the value is out of this specification, perform the step 7.

3–16 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

3-5 ISO CENTER ALIGNMENT (continued)


7. Adjust the X–Ray Tube Theta (tangential) position:

a. Rotate the Gantry until the X–Ray tube reaches the HOME position.

b. Switch OFF the ‘Scan’ and ‘TBL/Tilt’ switches at Gantry rear base.

c. Loosen the 4 mounting bolts (see illustration 3–2).

d. Locate the Adjustment Nuts for Theta; note that there are two Theta nuts for adjustment.

e. Loosen the nut that faces the direction in which you want to shift the tube.

f. Turn the other nut in the direction in which you want to shift the tube.

Note
D One turn of the nut results in approximately 1mm on tube movement.
D Use the micro dial gauge to help you adjusting the tube.

g. Tighten the nut previously loosened in step e.

h. Tighten the 4 mounting bolts.

i. Switch ON the ‘Scan’ and ‘TBL/Tilt’

j. Return to step 2.

8. Proceed to Section 3-6 ‘Filter Center Alignment’.

3–17 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

3-6 FILTER CENTER ALIGNMENT


This ‘Filter Center Alignment’ aligns the filter to the X–Ray Tube and Detector.

Illustration 3–10 Filter Center Alignment

X–ray
Tube
Focus
Center of Filter
Adjust

Filter

Ch1
Detector (Fixed)

Filter Center Ch.: 317.75 ± 0.3

VIEW FROM TABLE

1. Preparation:

You do not have to perform the following, if you have just completed the ‘Iso Center Alignment’ procedure.

a. Switch OFF the ‘Scan’ and ‘TBL/Tile’ switches at Gantry rear base.

b. Remove the front and both side Gantry covers.

c. Remove the bow–tie filter from the collimator (refer to the Component Replacement manual).

d. Switch ON the ‘Scan’ and ‘TBL/Tilt’ switches.

3–18 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

3-6 FILTER CENTER ALIGNMENT (continued)


2. Perform an axial scan:

You do not have to perform the following, if you have just completed the ‘Iso Center Alignment’ procedure.

a. Insert the BOOT floppy into the disk drive.

b. Touch the [Maint] key and enter $$ to display the Maintenance menu.

c. Select SUPPORT from the Maintenance menu.

d. Select OFF LINE SCAN from the Support menu.

e. Perform the following air axial scan:

Scan Time : 3.6 sec (CT Sytec 2000i, S)


2.7 sec (CT Sytec, 3000i)
1.8 sec (CT Sytec 4000i, Plus)
CW/CCW : CW
Thickness : 10 mm
KV : 120 KV
mA : 40 mA
(Others) : (defaults)

Series No. : 3

3. Perform a Filter axial scan:

a. Switch OFF the ‘Scan’ switch.

b. Install the bow–tie filter.

c. Switch ON the ‘Scan’ switch.

d. Perform the following filter axial scan:

Scan Time : 3.6 sec (CT Sytec 2000i, S)


2.7 sec (CT Sytec, 3000i)
1.8 sec (CT Sytec 4000i, Plus)
CW/CCW : CW
Thickness : 10 mm
KV : 120 KV
mA : 40 mA
(Others) : (defaults)

Series No. : 5

4. Press the [END] key to skip a menu and repeat this until ‘Support Menu’ is displayed.

3–19 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

3-6 FILTER CENTER ALIGNMENT (continued)


5. Check that the calculated Filter Center Channel data is within a specification:

a. Select ALIGNMENT from the Support menu.

b. Select FILTER CENTER CHANNEL.

c. Enter the raw data file Nos. previously acquired, as follows:

******************************* Displayed *******************************


** FILTER CENTER CHANNEL **
RAW DATA FILE (AIR)
Enter ID No. = 3 ‘CR’

RAW DATA FILE (PIN)


Enter ID No. = 5 ‘CR’
** START The computer starts calculation, and then displays following:
FILTER AVERAGE CH. = xxx.xxx (317.75±0.30)
MOVE FILTER x.xxx mm

************************************************************************

If the value is 317.75 ± 0.30, go to step 7.


If the value is out of this specification, perform the step 6.

3–20 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

3-6 FILTER CENTER ALIGNMENT (continued)


6. Adjust the filter Theta (tangential) position:

a. Rotate the Gantry until the X–Ray tube reaches the HOME position.

b. Switch OFF the ‘Scan’ and ‘TBL/Tilt’ switches at Gantry rear base.

c. Loosen the 2 bolts (see illustration 3–11).

d. Rotate the adjustment screw to shift the filter for the amount instructed on the CRT screen.

Note
D One turn of the screw results in approximately 1mm on filter movement.
D Use the micro dial gauge to help you adjusting the filter.

e. Tighten the 2 bolts loosened in step c.

f. Return to step 3.

7. Install the collimator cover and Gantry covers:

a. Switch OFF the ‘Scan’ and ‘TBL/Tilt’ switches at Gantry rear base.

b. Install the collimator cover and Gantry covers.

c. Switch ON the ‘Scan’ and ‘TBL/Tilt’ switches.

Illustration 3–11 Filter Center Alignment

Loosen Two Bolts

Adjustment Screw

3–21 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
blank 2234976

3–22 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

SECTION 4 – SYSTEM CALIBRATION

4-1 GENERAL
This section describes the procedure for evaluating the system image performance.

Verify completion of the following before performing the image performance verification.

1. The X–Ray Generator is calibrated.

2. Repeat the System Calibration before starting the image performance verification.

D X–Ray Tube replacement

D Detector replacement

D Collimator replacement

D Plane of rotation alignment

D Detector Beam–On–Window alignment

D Iso Center alignment

D Air and Phantom Calibrations

D CT Number Adjustment

3. Warm–Up the system at least 2 hours before the data collection.

4. All image performance scans must use calibration scans that are less than 8 hours old.

Required Phantoms
Use the following phantoms (furnished with each system) during image performance.
Make sure they are clean and contrast–free.

D Water Phantom (25 cm)

D Polypropylene (PP) Phantom (35 cm)

D Polypropylene (PP) Phantom (42 cm)

D Resolution/Linearity Phantom (20 cm)

D Quality Assurance (QA) Phantom

4–1 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

4-2 CALIBRATION

DANGER!!
X–RAY EXPOSURE !!
IN THIS SECTION, THE X–RAY EXPOSURE IS PERFORMED. ALWAYS VERIFY
THAT NO PEOPLE IS IN THE SCAN ROOM WHENEVER SCAN IS PERFORMED.

Use the automatic calibration program from the Maintenance menu to create the following CAL files:

Table 4–1 Calibration Files

Air Calibration Files


KV mA Phantom Aperture (mm) Direction
120 40 Air 1 CW/CCW
120 40 Air 3 CW/CCW
120 40 Air 5 CW/CCW
120 40 Air 10 CW/CCW

Phantom Calibration Files


KV mA Phantom Aperture (mm) Direction
120 160 25 cm 10 CW/CCW
120 160 35 cm 10 CW/CCW
120 160 42 cm 10 CW/CCW

Note
‘Initialize Air Data’ function is performed automatically in the automatic calibration program when the
tube is cool.

4–2 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

4-2 CALIBRATION (continued)


1. Touch the [Maint] key on the touch panel.

2. Select CALIBRATION.

3. Select AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION.

4. Follow the instructions that appear on the CRT screen. Install, exchange and center the phantoms according
to the direction that appears on the CRT.

Illustration 4–1 Automatic Calibration Flowchart

Initialize Air Data

Air Calibration
(10 / 5 / 3 / 1 mm)

25 cm Water Phantom Calibration

35 cm PP Phantom Calibration

42 cm PP Phantom Calibration

4–3 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

4-3 CT NUMBER ADJUSTMENT


Perform this ‘CT Number Adjustment’ after completing the air and phantom calibrations. In addition, if you have any
doubt whether the CT numbers of the phantom are good or not, perform the CT Number Adjustment. This adjustment
modifies the CT numbers of the 25 cm, 35 cm and 42 cm CAL files until water has a CT number equal to zero and
air has a CT number equal to –1000.

Perform the scan of air and the 25 cm water phantom for 25 cm , 35 cm and 42 cm FOV. Verify the CT numbers for
each scan and verify if they meet the specification. If they are out of specification, perform the CT Number Adjustment
as follows:

1. Perform air and water phantom scans according to the Table 4–2.

2. Record the CT number of each of all the air scan images acquire:

a. Display the first acquired air scan image.

b. Display a circular cursor specified in the Table 4–2, at the reconstruction center.

c. Press the [ROI] key, and record the displayed mean value to the Table 4–2.

d. Repeat step c. for the other acquired images.

3. Record the CT number of each of all the water scan images acquired, similarly as step 2.

Table 4–2 Air and Water CT Numbers

System Scan FOV Air CT Number Water CT Number


Time (cm)
CT Number Average CT Number Average
25 CW : CW :
CCW : CCW :
35 CW : CW :
CT Sytec,
Sytec 3000i,
3000i 4000i,
4000i Plus 27
2.7
CCW : CCW :
42 CW : CW :
CCW : CCW :
25 CW : CW :
CCW : CCW :
35 CW : CW :
CT Sytec 2000i,
2000i S 36
3.6
CCW : CCW :
42 CW : CW :
CCW : CCW :
Scan Parameters Scan Parameter
KV : 120kv KV : 120kv
mA : 40mA mA : 130mA
Thickness : 10mm Thickness : 10mm
ROI Size (diameter) : 23cm ROI Size (diameter) : 6cm

4–4 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

4-3 CT NUMBER ADJUSTMENT (continued)


4. Calculate an average of the 2 slices CT number for each FOV, and record it to the Table 4–2.

5. Enter the recorded CT numbers in the ‘ADJUST CT #’ program:

a. Insert the BOOT floppy into the disk drive.

b. Touch the [Maint] key and enter $$ to display the Maintenance menu.

c. Select CT No. ADJUST from the Maintenance menu.

d. Select CHANGE CT No., the following menu appears:

– – CHANGE CT No. – –
<CALIBRATION FILE MENU>
(FOV 25 cm) (FOV 35 cm) (FOV 42 cm)
TH TH TH
1. 10 mm 5. 10 mm 9. 10 mm
2. 5 mm 6. 5 mm 10. 5 mm CT Sytec, 3000i, 4000i,
3. 3 mm 7. 3 mm 11. 3 mm
4. 1 mm 8. 1 mm 12. 1 mm Plus

1. 10 mm 5. 10 mm 9. 10 mm
2. 5 mm 6. 5 mm 10. 5 mm CT Sytec 2000i, S
3. 1 mm 7. 1 mm 12. 1 mm

<xx>
<xx–yy>
Select No. <xx,yy,zz> = 1–4 ‘CR’

e. Specify each CAL file, and enter air CT# and water CT#, from the Table 4–2.

FOV 25cm
TH 10mm
Enter AIR CT# (–1000.00) = –998.50 ‘CR’ (Enter new CT number for Air)
Enter WATER CT# ( 0.00) = 2.43 ‘CR’ (Enter new CT number for Water)
β<OLD> 7.84 E–0.4 <NEW> 7.83 E–0.4
γ<OLD> 0.00 <NEW> –2.43
OK?<0:YES, 1:NO> 0 ‘CR’

Repeat this program for each of the other CALs.

6. Check that the water CT# and air CT# equal 0 ± 3 and –1000 ± 5 respectively, by performing Retro Recons. Re-
peat steps 1 through 5 until the specifications are met.

If the Retro Recon FOV is the same as for the last scan FOV, the CT number will not be updated. Perform scans
and Retro recons in order of [Scan (FOV25→FOV35→FOV42) → Retro Recon (FOV25→FOV35→FOV42)]

7. Save these updated CAL files to floppy disks, if necessary.

4–5 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
blank 2234976

4–6 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

SECTION 5 – IMAGE PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION

DANGER!!
X–RAY EXPOSURE !!
IN THIS SECTION, THE X–RAY EXPOSURE IS PERFORMED. ALWAYS VERIFY
THAT NO PEOPLE IS IN THE SCAN ROOM WHENEVER SCAN IS PERFORMED.

5-1 GENERAL
This ‘Image Performance Verification’ contains tables of scan techniques and specifications for evaluating image per-
formance.

General Requirements
D Verify that system calibration (air and phantom calibrations) has been completed.

Required Phantoms
Use the following phantoms (furnished with each system) during image performance verification.

D Water Phantom (25cm)

D Polypropylene (PP) Phantom (35cm)

D Polypropylene (PP) Phantom (42cm)

D Quality Assurance (QA) Phantom

5–1 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

5-2 IMAGE PERFORMANCE


1. Acquire the scans listed in Table 5–1 ∼ 5–3 (see the Table below).

Table No. Product


5–1 Sytec 2000i, S
5–2 Sytec, 3000i
5–3 Sytec 4000i, Plus

Note
D Always select ‘Abdomen’ for patient anatomy of interest.
D Archive images marked with ‘:’ in Table 5–1 ∼ 5–3.

2. For each slice, verify the following:

D Visually check each image for rings, bands streaks, shadings or artifacts near he image center.

D Position a circular ROI (2cm diameter) at the location s listed below (see illustration 5–1), and write down
the data on the Table.

Xc – Mean CT number of a center ROI.


Xo – Mean CT number of a ROI 10cm off center.
Xi – Mean CT number of a ROI –10cm off center.
δc – Standard deviation of the center ROI.
δo – Standard deviation of the ROI 10cm off center.

Illustration 5–1 ROI Locations

+Y
ROI Circle (2cm Diameter)
Image

–X +X
Xi Xc Xo
(–10.0 cm) (0.0 cm) (10.0 cm)

–Y

5–2 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

5-2 IMAGE PERFORMANCE (continued)

Resolution Check using QA Phantom


Illustration 5–2 shows the resolution (line pairs) section of the QA phantom. Resolution specification ‘A’ and ‘C’ in Table
5–1 ∼ 5–3 shows the maximum line pairs you should see on the resolution section of the QA phantom for the technique
and parameters indicated.

The procedure for setting up a target using the STANDARD and EDGE algorithm to check resolution specification
(i.e., all line pairs visible for pattern ‘A’) follows:

1. Scan QA phantom using RETRO RECON (STANDARD, RFOV=10cm).

2. Display the QA phantom image, and verify that ‘C’ is visible.

3. Position a 10cm diameter circular cursor, so it encloses line pairs ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’.

4. Press [Retro Recon] key.

5. Select EDGE Recon.

6. Display the target image, and verify that ‘A’ is visible.

Streak Check using PP Phantom (42cm)


Perform the PP phantom scan two times, and subtract the first image from the second image.
Verify that the subtracted image has no streaks. (Rings might remain on the image, but they are no problems.)

Offset Drift Check using PP Phantom (42cm)


Perform the PP phantom scans using the technic of RETRO RECON (Segment 1 and 3), and subtract the Seg1 image
from the Seg3 image, and record the CT number (Xo and Xi) of the subtracted image.
Verify that | Xo–Xi | is smaller than 5.

Artifact Check using QA Phantom


Perform the QA phantom scan using anatomy of scan interest other than Head and Posterior Fossa and technic of
RETRO RECON (DETAIL, RFOV=10cm, X=0, Y=0). Verify that the image has no artifact.

5–3 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

5-2 IMAGE PERFORMANCE (continued)

Illustration 5–2 QA Phantom

Location Line Pairs/cm Resolution in mm F


E
A 9.80 0.53 D
C
B 7.81 0.64 A B

C 6.17 0.81 G H I
D 4.90 1.02
E 3.85 1.30
F 3.07 1.63
J
G 2.43 2.06
H 1.93 2.59
k
I 1.54 3.25
J 1.05 4.76
K 0.63 7.94 Line Pair

5–4 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

5-3 QUALITY ASSURANCE


The 46–241852G1 Quality Assurance Phantom is used by both the customers and service people to assess image
quality in accordance with BRH requirements (21CFR, Section 1030 33). Use of this phantom is described in the
Operator’s Manual.

The operator’s manual instructs customers to perform QA checks on a daily basis. Service persons, however, shall
perform QA checks after any of the following events has occurred:

D System installation

D X–ray Tube replacement

D Detector replacement

D KV/ma calibration

D Periodic maintenance

Note
The service person shall complete all of the procedures in the Operator’s Manual.

5–5 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
blank 2234976

5–6 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

Table 5–1 Image Performance Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CT Sytec 2000i, S

PTM FOV Time mA THK Specification Data Image Description


(cm) (sec) (mm) Archive
Xc δc Xo Xi Xc δc Xo Xi
42cm PP 42 3.6 60 10 – – – – : Perform Streak Check
160 2 – – – – : Perform Offset Drift Check
35cm PP 42 3.6 130 10 M35 ≤ 6.6 Xc±3 – – –120 ≤ M35 ≤ –100
160 5 M35±3 – – – – M35 : measured CT#

160 2 M35±3 – – – –
130 10 M35±3 – – – –
35 3.6 130 10 N35 ≤ 7.1 Xc±3 – – : –120 ≤ N35 ≤ –100
130 5 N35±3 ≤ 9.5 – – – N35 : measured CT#

160 2 N35±3 ≤ 14.8 – – –


80 10 N35±3 ≤ 10.9 – – –
25cm WTR 35 3.6 130 10 0±2 ≤ 4.3 – – – : Perform Artifact Check
160 5 0±3 ≤ 6.3 – – –
160 2 0±3 ≤ 9.3 – – –
80 10 0±3 ≤ 6.6 – – –

5–7 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

Table 5–1 Image Performance Check (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CT Sytec 2000i, S

PTM FOV Time mA THK Specification Data Image Description


(cm) (sec) (mm) Archive
Xc δc Xo Xi Xc δc Xo Xi
25cm WTR 25 3.6 160 10 0±2 ≤ 4.5 – – – Perform Artifact Check
160 5 0±2 ≤ 5.4 – – –
160 2 0±2 ≤ 8.9 – – –
130 10 0±2 ≤ 4.8 – – –
100 10 0±2 ≤ 5.3 – – –
80 10 0±2 ≤ 5.8 – – –
60 10 0±2 ≤ 6.3 – – –
40 10 0±2 ≤ 8.2 – – –
Linearity 25 3.6 80 10 – – – – – : Perform Artifact Check
35 3.6 80 10 – – – – –
25 3.6 160 10 – – – – – :
25 3.6 160 10 – – – – – :
25cm WTR 25 3.6 60 10 0±3 ≤ 3.7 – – – Perform Artifact Check
15cm WTR 25 3.6 40 10 0±3 – – – – Perform Artifact Check
80 5 0±3 – – – –
100 2 0±3 – – – –
RES 25 3.6 130 10 – – – – – Perform Resolution Check

5–8 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

Table 5–2 Image Performance Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CT Sytec 3000i

PTM FOV Time mA THK Specification Data Image Description


(cm) (sec) (mm) Archive
Xc δc Xo Xi Xc δc Xo Xi
42cm PP 42 2.7 60 10 – – – – : Perform Streak Check
4.5 160 1 – – – – : Perform Offset Drift Check
35cm PP 42 4.5 100 10 M35 ≤ 6.8 Xc±3 – – –120 ≤ M35 ≤ –100
160 5 M35±3 – – – – M35 : measured CT#

160 3 M35±3 – – – –
160 1 M35±3 – – – –
2.7 100 10 M35±3 – – –
35 4.5 100 10 N35 ≤ 6.9 Xc±3 – – : –120 ≤ N35 ≤ –100
100 5 N35±3 ≤ 9.9 – – – N35 : measured CT#

160 3 N35±3 ≤ 10.6 – – –


160 1 N35±3 ≤ 16.2 – – –
2.7 160 10 N35±3 ≤ 9.4 – –
25cm WTR 35 4.5 100 10 0±2 ≤ 4.2 – – – : Perform Artifact Check
160 5 0±3 ≤ 4.9 – – –
160 3 0±3 ≤ 6.6 – – –
160 1 0±3 ≤ 10.7 – – –
2.7 160 10 0±3 ≤ 5.7 – – –

5–9 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

Table 5–2 Image Performance Check (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CT Sytec 3000i

PTM FOV Time mA THK Specification Data Image Description


(cm) (sec) (mm) Archive
Xc δc Xo Xi Xc δc Xo Xi
25cm WTR 25 4.5 160 10 0±2 ≤ 3.5 – – – : Perform Artifact Check
160 5 0±2 ≤ 5.0 – – –
160 3 0±2 ≤ 6.4 – – –
160 1 0±2 ≤ 9.7 – – – :
130 10 0±2 ≤ 3.9 – – –
100 10 0±2 ≤ 4.5 – – –
80 10 0±2 ≤ 5.0 – – –
60 10 0±2 ≤ 5.7 – – –
40 10 0±2 ≤ 7.0 – – –
2.7 160 10 0±2 ≤ 4.5 – – – :
Linearity 25 4.5 80 10 – – – – – : Perform Artifact Check
35 4.5 80 10 – – – – –
25 2.7 160 10 – – – – – :
25 2.7 160 10 – – – – – :
25cm WTR 25 2.7 80 10 0±3 ≤ 3.7 – – – Perform Artifact Check
15cm WTR 25 4.5 40 10 0±3 – – – – Perform Artifact Check
80 5 0±3 – – – –
100 3 0±3 – – – –
160 1 0±3 – – – –
RES 25 4.5 130 10 – – – – – Perform Resolution Check

5–10 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

Table 5–3 Image Performance Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CT Sytec 4000i, Plus

PTM FOV Time mA THK Specification Data Image Description


(cm) (sec) (mm) Archive
Xc δc Xo Xi Xc δc Xo Xi
42cm PP 42 1.8 60 10 – – – – : Perform Streak Check
4.5 160 1 – – – – : Perform Offset Drift Check
35cm PP 42 4.5 100 10 M35 ≤ 6.8 Xc±3 – – –120 ≤ M35 ≤ –100
160 5 M35±3 – – – – M35 : measured CT#

160 3 M35±3 – – – –
160 1 M35±3 – – – –
2.7 100 10 M35±3 – – –
35 4.5 100 10 N35 ≤ 6.9 Xc±3 – – : –120 ≤ N35 ≤ –100
100 5 N35±3 ≤ 9.9 – – – N35 : measured CT#

160 3 N35±3 ≤ 10.6 – – –


160 1 N35±3 ≤ 16.2 – – –
1.8 160 10 N35±3 ≤ 10.9 – –
25cm WTR 35 4.5 100 10 0±2 ≤ 4.2 – – – : Perform Artifact Check
160 5 0±3 ≤ 4.9 – – –
160 3 0±3 ≤ 6.6 – – –
160 1 0±3 ≤ 10.7 – – –
1.8 160 10 0±3 ≤ 8.3 – – –

5–11 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

Table 5–3 Image Performance Check (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CT Sytec 4000i, Plus

PTM FOV Time mA THK Specification Data Image Description


(cm) (sec) (mm) Archive
Xc δc Xo Xi Xc δc Xo Xi
25cm WTR 25 4.5 160 10 0±2 ≤ 3.5 – – – : Perform Artifact Check
160 5 0±2 ≤ 5.0 – – –
160 3 0±2 ≤ 6.4 – – –
160 1 0±2 ≤ 9.7 – – – :
130 10 0±2 ≤ 3.9 – – –
100 10 0±2 ≤ 4.5 – – –
80 10 0±2 ≤ 5.0 – – –
60 10 0±2 ≤ 5.7 – – –
40 10 0±2 ≤ 7.0 – – –
2.7 160 10 0±2 ≤ 4.5 – – – :
1.8 160 10 0±2 ≤ 5.5 – – –
Linearity 25 4.5 80 10 – – – – – : Perform Artifact Check
35 4.5 80 10 – – – – –
25 1.8 160 10 – – – – – :
25 1.8 160 10 – – – – – :
25cm WTR 25 2.7 80 10 0±3 ≤ 3.7 – – – Perform Artifact Check
15cm WTR 25 4.5 40 10 0±3 – – – – Perform Artifact Check
80 5 0±3 – – – –
100 3 0±3 – – – –
160 1 0±3 – – – –
RES 25 4.5 130 10 – – – – – Perform Resolution Check

5–12 SYSTEM
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

OPERATOR CONSOLE

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION PAGE

SECTION 1 – OC COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1


1-1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1-2 DC POWER SUPPLIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
1-3 FANS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5
1-4 BOARD LOCATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–6
1-5 CRT MONITOR CONTROLS AND SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–7
1-6 PANEL ASSY TILT ANGLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–8

SECTION 2 – OC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1


2-1 SYSTEM POWER UP SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2-2 AUDIO FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5
2-2-1 Auto Voice and X–Ray On Buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6
2-2-2 Error Detection Buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–8
2-3 IMAGE ARCHIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9
2-4 DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10
2-5 FAST PROCESSING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–11

i OPERATOR CONSOLE
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
blank 2234976

ii OPERATOR CONSOLE
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

SECTION 1 – OC COMPONENTS

1-1 GENERAL

Definition of Terms
D OC . . . . . . . . . . . . Operator Console
D HD . . . . . . . . . . . . Hard Disk
D FD . . . . . . . . . . . . Floppy Disk
D MT . . . . . . . . . . . . Magnetic Tape
D OD . . . . . . . . . . . . Optical Disk
D MOD . . . . . . . . . . Magnetic Optical Disk
D CPW . . . . . . . . . . Central Processing Unit
D IPU16M . . . . . . . Image Processing Unit with 16MB memory
D DISP . . . . . . . . . . Display Processor
D SBPU . . . . . . . . . Back Projection Unit
D TPC . . . . . . . . . . . Touch Panel Controller
D MISC . . . . . . . . . . Miscellaneous Function Board (including DBU, OC I/F, and MFC controller)
D ISC . . . . . . . . . . . . In–Site Controller
D MTC . . . . . . . . . . Magnetic Tape controller
D ODC2 . . . . . . . . . Optical Disk Controller
D SCSI . . . . . . . . . . Small Computer System Interface
D SBB . . . . . . . . . . . Main Backplane
D SIMM . . . . . . . . . Single In–Line Memory Module

1–1 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-2 DC POWER SUPPLIES


The Operator Console contains two power supplies: +12V and +5V.

1. Switch OFF the Operator Console.

2. Remove the OC front cover.

Ground Connection
If this is the first time to check the OC power supplies after system installation, perform this ‘Ground Connection’
check.

3. Check the ground connection of the power supplies:

a. Connect a digital multimeter between the OC ground stud and ground (FG terminal) on one power supply.
(Multimeter : resistance measure mode)

b. Verify that the resistance reads less than 0.2Ω.

If resistance exceeds the above value, tighten, clean or re–crimp connections, and measure again.

c. Perform the above check on the other power supply.

Illustration 1–6 Measure Points

1–2 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-2 DC POWER SUPPLIES (continued)

Voltage Check
Note
When you adjust power supply potentiometers, slowly turn them; otherwise, power supply built–in
protector will shut themselves down. If this happens, switch OFF the Operator Console, wait approxi-
mately three minutes, and switch ON the OC.

4. Check the output of the +5 VDC power supply:

a. Connect a digital multimeter across the capacitor at the front edge of the IPU board (Slot #2).
(Multimeter: voltage measure mode)

b. Switch ON the Operator Console.

c. Measure the voltage and check that it is within +5.0 VDC ± 0.1 VDC.

If it falls outside these limits, adjust it by turning the potentiometer.

Note
When the system contains the optional MOD, this voltage should be within +5.0 VDC ∼ +5.1 VDC.

d. Connect an oscilloscope to the same points as above.

e. Observe the voltage and check that the ripple is less than 200 mVp–p.

If it falls outside this range, replace the power supply.

Illustration 1–7 Measure Points for OC Power Supply

Voltage Adjusting
Potentiometers

IPU Board Capacitor

1–3 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-2 DC POWER SUPPLIES (continued)


5. Check the output of the +12 VDC power supply.

a. Connect a digital multimeter at the terminal strip on the front of the power supply.

b. Measure the voltage and check that it is within +11.8 VDC ∼ +12.4 VDC.

If it falls outside these limits, adjust it by turning the potentiometer.

c. Connect an oscilloscope to the same points as above.

d. Observe the voltage and check that the ripple is less than 100 mVp–p.

If it falls outside this range, replace the power supply.

Illustration 1–8 Measure Points for 12VDC Power Supply

1–4 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-3 FANS

CAUTION
Rotating FAN assemblies !
Do not place any item into rotating blades. Use extra care when wording near FAN assem-
blies.

1. Switch OFF the Operator Console.

2. Remove the OC front cover.

3. Switch ON the OC.

4. Locate and verify the operation of the following Fans. If any Fan is defective, replace the unit.

Illustration 1–9 OC Fan Locations

6 at the upper rear side of the Console


1 behind the 5VDC power supply
9 at the bottom of the nest chassis

1–5 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-4 BOARD LOCATION


1. Switch OFF the Operator Console.

2. Remove the OC front cover.

3. Verify that all boards and units are firmly and correctly seated.

Illustration 1–10 OC Board Locations

Slot No. Board Name Description


01 . . . CPW
02 . . . IPU2
03 . . . DISP
04 . . . SBPU . . . . . . . . For Sytec 4000i, Plus Only
05 . . . TPC
06 . . . MISC
07 . . . ISC
08 . . . AUX1 . . . . . . . . For Option
09 . . . AUX2 . . . . . . . . For Option
Board for AUX Slots
SCSI
ODC2
MTC
COMX3
ETC
Interface Nest
Panel I/F
Audio AV–Amp
DAS I/F

NOTICE

If two option boards are installed, the highter priority board board should be installed to
AUX1 slot. The board listed lowest on the list should be inserted into AUX2 slot, and the re-
maining board should be inserted in AUX1.

AUX1
(Slot8) Empty (no second board)
SCSI
ODC2
MTC
COMX3
AUX2 ETC
(Slot9)
Example : If both SCSI and MTC are installed, the SCSI must be inserted in AUX1
and MTC in AUX2.

1–6 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-5 CRT MONITOR CONTROLS AND SWITCHES


The OC CRT monitor has some controls and switches as shown in illustration .

1. Set the controls and switches as follows

CRT ON/OFF SW : Set to ‘ON’


BRIGHTNESS CONTROL : Adjust to desired brightness
CONTRAST CONTROL : Adjust to desired contrast
VIDEO TERMINATION SW : Set to ‘75Ω’

Illustration 1–11 CRT Monitor Controls and Switches

Brightness
Control CRT On/OFF
Contrast
Control

ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ Video
Video
OUT
Video
IN
Termination

Ú
CRT MONITOR REAR VIEW 125V M2A
100V
75Ω
OFF

Glass Fuse Holder


(125V 2A)

1–7 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-6 PANEL ASSY TILT ANGLE


1. Remove the rear lower cover of the touch panel by unscrewing its one screw.

2. Insert a screwdriver into a hole of one adjuster knob.

3. Rotate the driver counterclockwise to loosen the knob.

4. Loosen the other knob.

5. Adjust the tilt angle.

6. Tighten the knobs using a screwdriver.

tighten the knobs such that the pin remains inserted in the two holes of part A and B

7. Install the rear lower cover

Illustration 1–12 Touch Panel Tilt Angle Adjustment

Pin

Tighten
Cover
Screw

Loosen

Screw Driver

1–8 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

SECTION 2 – OC OPERATION

2-1 SYSTEM POWER UP SEQUENCE


Turn ON power to the OC, or pull the reset switch beneath the console table extension, to load the system software
programs from the hard disk into memory.
After software/hardware initialization in each processor, the system begins start–up processes such as initial program
loading, system initialization, and the applications program start up.
A program in firmware on the processor board (CPW) oversees these operations and displays their status before
DISP TEST (Phase 1) on 8 bit LED’s and status after CPW TEST (Phase 2) on the CRT monitor.
The LED’s display a hex code that describes the test in progress during a normal power–up. These ‘Progress Codes’
become error codes when the system fails during power up.
Upon successful completion of the power–up sequence, the ‘CT Sytec’ logo message appears on the CRT monitor.

FLOWCHART

START

System Initialize SYSTEM


(FFHH) PREPARATION

System Initialize End


(01H)

CPW Test (Phase 1) Initial Boot–Up Boot–Up


(11H–18H) (60H) Sequence
DISP Test (Phase 1) OS Loading

ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
(30H–38H) (70H)

ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
Power–Up CPW Test (Phase 2) OS Start
(1FH) (80H)

ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
Self Test

ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ IPU Test Application Load & Start

ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
(40H–4EH) (8FH–90H)

ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
DISP Test (Phase 2)

ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
(39H–3FH)

ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
MISC Test
(24H–2FH) Input Date/Time

ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓ : The status is displayed on the CRT. SYSTEM READY

ÓÓÓ
2–1 OPERATOR CONSOLE
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-1 SYSTEM POWER UP SEQUENCE (continued)

PROCEDURE
1. Switch OFF the OC power.

2. Remove the OC front cover.

3. Verify that the BOOT SELECT switch on the CPW assy (Slot #1) is set as illustrated below:

Illustration 2–1 Boot Select Switch

OFF : ‘0’
1 2 3 4
DNP4

4. Set the TEST MODE switches on the CPW assy (Slot #1) as shown in Table below:

Table 2–1 Test Mode Switch Settings

Test Mode Power On Power On Test OFF


(SW No.) Test 1 Test 2
1 OFF OFF ON
2 OFF OFF X
3 OFF ON X
4 X X X 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
5 X X X BPSL
6 X X X
7 X X X
8 X X X

5. Switch ON OC power or pull the system reset switch located on the underside of the OC keyboard enclosure.

6. Verify that ‘SYSTEM TEST IN PROGRESS’ appears on the CRT monitor.

Approximately 4 minutes (Test 1) or more than 13 minutes (Test2) later, ‘SYSTEM PREPARATION’ appears on
the CRT monitor.

Approximately 16 seconds later, the current date appears.


Change the date of press the RETURN key to accept it.
Respond to the time the same way.

System logo message, with software revision, appears on the CRT monitor.
Press the STATUS key and check for error messages.
If the other subsystems have been turned ON, the initial screen appears on the LCD screen.

2–2 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-1 SYSTEM POWER UP SEQUENCE (continued)


The start–up LED status for all the OC nest circuit boards is shown in illustration 2–2 and 2–3.

Illustration 2–2 LED Status at Start–Up

ISC MISC TPC (SBPU) DISP IPU2 CPW

TEST STATUS STATUS TEST


7 7 7 7
6 6 6 6
5 5 5 5
DSR(DTR) 4 4 4 4
DCD 3 3 3 3
RI 2 2 2 2
1 1 1 1
0 0 0 0
RESET
INTERRUPT
HALT
FAIL

RESET OVL
DMA IMG
DTE0 FB1
DTE1 DB1
VSYNC
SBUS
DMA
IOBUS

DSR(DTR)
DCD
RI

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Slot No.

........ Illuminate
........ Blink
........ Illuminate Slightly
........ Extinguish

2–3 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-1 SYSTEM POWER UP SEQUENCE (continued)

Illustration 2–3 LED Status at Start–Up for Option

SCSI ODC2 MTC COMX3 ETC

STATUS STATUS STATUS


7 7 15
6 6 14
5 5 13
4 4 12
3 3 11
2 2 10
1 1 9
0 0 8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
FULL FULL
EMP HALF
CRC EMP
CEN
BEN
INTR
DMA

FAIL ........ Illuminate


........ Blink
........ Illuminate Slightly
RES T3 ........ Extinguish
HALT T2
BERR T1
T0

AUX1 or AUX2
(AUX1) (AUX2) Slot No.
Higher Level Lower Level

NOTICE

If two option boards are installed, the higher priority board should be installed to AUX1 slot.
Refer to xxx.

2–4 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-2 AUDIO FUNCTION


The ‘Audio Function’ procedure includes the following check/adjustments:

D Auto Voice Volume

D X–Ray On Buzzer Volume

D Noise Reduction of Auto Voice

D Error Detection Buzzer

Illustration 2–4 Audio Assy

JP3 SW1 : Auto Voice Start


SW2 : Auto Voice Test Pattern Select
VR1 : X–Ray On Buzzer
JP2 VR2 : Auto Switch (Do not adjust)
SW2 VR3 : Auto Voice (Gantry) (Do not adjust)
VR4 : Auto Voice (OC)
VR5 : Feedback Prevention
SW1 VR6 : Feedback Gain
VR5 JP1
JP1 : Auto or Manual
JP2 : X–Ray On Buzzer
JP3 : Foot Switch
VR1
VR3

VR4
VR2
VR6

2–5 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-2 AUDIO FUNCTION (continued)

2-2-1 Auto Voice and X–Ray On Buzzer

Preparation
1. Move the AUDIO Board to position such that jumpers and variable resistors van be accessed while adjusting
audio functions:

a. Switch OFF the OC power.

b. Remove the OC front cover.

c. Remove the screws of the base plate for the AUDIO Board, and move this board from the nest to an appropri-
ate position.

If necessary, disconnect any cables, and reconnect them.

Auto Voice Volume


2. Disconnect the CN7 cable from the AUDIO Board.

3. Set the jumpers, switches, and variable resistors (VR) to the following position.

JP1 – Set to ‘AUTO’


JP2 – Set to ‘NORM’
JP3 – Set to ‘NORM’
SW2 – Set to ‘F’
VR5 – Turn fully in the counterclockwise direction.

4. Set the intercom volume ‘From Patient’ on the OC panel to the middle position.

5. Switch ON the OC power.

6. Push SW1 to activate the sound of the Auto voice during which adjust the proper volume in the OC room using
potentiometer VR4.

NOTICE

D Verify that the Audio Board is Rev.3 or above.


D Incase sound is noisy, turn the VR6 counterclockwise until sound is clear.

7. Connect the CN7 cable.

2–6 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-2 AUDIO FUNCTION (continued)

2-2-1 Auto Voice and X–Ray On Buzzer (continued)

X–Ray On Buzzer Volume


8. Set jumper JP2 to ‘TEST’ position to activate the X–Ray on buzzer in the Operator Console room.

9. Adjust the volume with VR1 as desired.

10. Set the jumper JP2 to the ‘NORM’ position.

Noise Reduction for Auto Voice


11. Set the intercom volume ‘To Patient’ on the OC panel to the clockwise limit position.

12. Disconnect the CN7 cable.

13. Push SW1 to activate the Auto voice and then confirm that unnecessary noise is not produced at the time of voice
termination (that is, when the Auto voice finishes and you start to hear the Gantry fan operation sound through
the speaker).

If you hear noise at this change–over point, turn VR5 clockwise slightly, and repeat the check.

At the same time confirm that the start of the Auto voice is not cut off short (this will occur if VR5 is turned too
much).

14. Connect the CN7 cable.

15. Set the jumper JP1 to ‘MNL’ position.

16. Set the intercom volumes ‘From Patient’ and ‘To Patient’ to their usual positions (used by the operator).

17. Switch OFF the OC power, and restore the OC to original configuration.

2–7 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-2 AUDIO FUNCTION (continued)

2-2-2 Error Detection Buzzer


The KB Sub Board has a variable resistor (VR7) which adjusts the volume of error beeps.

1. Switch OFF the Operator Console.

2. Remove the following covers:

D OC Front Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Six(6) Screws


D Keyboard Lower Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Six(6) Screws

3. Switch ON the OC. Verify that the system starts up normally.

4. Press any alpha–numeric key to make a beep.

Rotate the variable resistor (VR7) to adjust the loudness.

Illustration 2–5 KB Sub Board

Keyboard
Lower Cover

KB Sub Board

ÙÙÙÙÙÙÙÙÙÙ
ÙÙÙÙÙÙÙÙÙÙ

2–8 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-3 IMAGE ARCHIVE

FD Initialize
1. Make sure that the scratch floppy disk is not write protected, inset it into the floppy disk drive.

The green LED on the drive will light up when the floppy is in place.

2. Press the [File Mgt] key to enter the Image File Management menu, and select function 11 to initialize the floppy
disk.

3. The work screen asks if this is a system or scratch floppy.

Enter 1 for scratch, give the floppy an IS number, and initialization will begin.

4. Make sure initialization is completed successfully and that no error massage appears on the status display.

FD Retrieve / Store
1. Retrieve an image from the QA IMAGE floppy disk and load it on the hard disk.

Make sure no error message appears on the status display.

2. Store an image from the hard disk to the scratch floppy disk

Make sure no error message appears on the status display.

2–9 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-4 DISPLAY
The following procedure assumes OC power has been applied and several images exist on the hard disk. If no image
exists on the hard disk, use the QA IMAGE floppy disk supplied with the system for this procedure.

Image Call
1. Press the [Patient List] key, and verify the following:

D The CRT monitor displays the patient image directory.

D The character cursor blinks on the last line for key entry.

2. Enter study number from the patient image list and verify the following (Do not press the [Return] key):

D The cursor shifts one character to the right every single digit you enter.

D The number you enter echoes back on the CRT monitor.

3. Press the [Return] key, and verify the following:

D The ‘1’ LED on the IPU assy turns ON, then OFF.

D The ‘SBUS’ LED on the DISP assy turns ON, then OFF.

D The ‘IMG’ LED on the DISP assy turns ON.

D The requested image appears on the CRT monitor.

Window/Level Operation
1. Display an image on the CRT monitor, then press the [Window] key located at the upper right side of the keyboard
to change the window width WW.

2. Press the [Level] key located at the upper right side of the keyboard to change the window level WL.

3. Press the [TB W/L] key, move the trackball, and verify the following:

D The TB W/L indication above the [TB W/L] key lights in green.

D Make sure the window width, window level, or both, change when you move the trackball in the corre-
sponding direction.

2–10 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-4 DISPLAY (continued)

Cursor Operation
1. Press the [Crsr] key and verify the following:

D Crosshair cursor + appears on the image screen.

D The CRSR indication appears on the grey scale.

2. Make sure the cursor appears and disappears when you press the [Crsr] key.

Move the trackball, and verify that cursor movement follows the trackball.

3. Press the [Crsr] key again, and verify that the cursor disappears from the CRT screen.

2-5 FAST PROCESSING UNIT


1. Press the [Patient List] key, and enter a Study No. from the list to display an image on the CRT screen.

2. Press the [Crsr] key to display the crosshair cursor.

3. Press the [Mag] key, and enter a magnification factor between 1.0 and 9.9 .

The image should enlarge accordingly.

4. Press the [Display Normal] key.

The image should reset to the original size.

5. Press the [f/j] key once or twice to turn the crosshair into a circle cursor or a box cursor.

6. Press the [Mag] key to enlarge the area of the image enclosed by the circle or box to full screen.

If the image is not magnified and the [Range Out] message appears, press the [Size] key and use the trackball
to enlarge the cursor, then try again.

2–11 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
blank 2234976

2–12 OPERATOR CONSOLE


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

GANTRY

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION PAGE

SECTION 1 – DC POWER SUPPLIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1


1-1 DC POWER SUPPLIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

SECTION 2 – GANTRY MECHANISM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1


2-1 SAFETY CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2-2 G. PULSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
2-3 CWR/CCWR PHOTO SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6
2-4 MANUAL ROTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–8
2-5 CABLE TAKE–UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10
2-6 AZIMUTH BELT TENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–12
2-7 GANTRY GEAR/PULLEY ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–13

SECTION 3 – ROTATIONAL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1


3-1 TGP BOARD INITIAL CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3-2 GANTRY INITIALIZE MOVEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2
3-3 MOVEMENT CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4
3-4 ROTATION JITTER CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
3-5 D/A CONVERTER OFFSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6
3-6 ROTATION VELOCITY OFFSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–7
3-7 ROTATION VELOCITY GAIN (ROTATION SPEED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–8
3-8 RAMP TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9

SECTION 4 – TILT OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1


4-1 ROTATION CHECK WITH TILTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4-2 TILT GUIDE ROLLERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2
4-3 TILT ROLLERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
4-4 TILT SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
4-5 TILT ANGLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–7

SECTION 5 – COLLIMATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1


5-1 APERTURE RATIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5-2 BOW–TIE FILTER CURVE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–3

SECTION 6 – TABLE AND GANTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1


6-1 TABLE POSITIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1
6-2 POSITIONING LIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4
6-3 POSITIONING LIGHT BREAKER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–12
6-4 TABLE AND GANTRY INTERLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–13

i GANTRY
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
blank 2234976

ii GANTRY
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

SECTION 1 – DC POWER SUPPLIES

1-1 DC POWER SUPPLIES


1. Switch OFF the ‘Scan’ and ‘TBL/Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.

2. Remove the front and both side covers.

3. Check DC power supply voltages on the TGP board, according to Table below

Table 1–1 Power Supply Specifications

DC Voltage Test Pins for Measure Specification Power Supply


+ 5V + 5VSTP ∼ DGNDSTP 5V ± 0.1V PS 1
+ 15V + 15VSTP ∼ AGNDSTP 15V ± 0.9V
– 5V – 15VSTP ∼ AGNDSTP – 15V ± 0.9V
+ 24V + 24VSTP ∼ PGNDSTP 24V ± 1.4V PS 2

Table 1–2 Power Supply Specifications (Sub Board)

DC Voltage Test Pins for Measure Specification Description


+ 24V GNT + 24VSTP ∼ COMSTP 24V ± 1.4V
+ 24V TBL + 24VSTP ∼ COMSTP 24V ± 1.4V for System with Table P9155AF only

Verify that the +5V and +24V power supply voltages are within specifications.

If not, adjust the voltage with the appropriate potentiometer (see illustration 1–1).

1–1 GANTRY
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-1 DC POWER SUPPLIES (continued)

Illustration 1–1 Power Supply Location

ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
Adjustment

ÇÇ
Volume

ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
Adjustment
Volume

ÇÇ
TGP Board ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ

1–2 GANTRY
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

SECTION 2 – GANTRY MECHANISM

2-1 SAFETY CHECK


1. Move the Gantry to the home and 0° tilt position.

2. Turn OFF the ‘Scan’ ‘Control’ and ‘TBL/Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.

3. Remove the rear and both side covers.

4. Verify that the SYS/OFF/MNL switch on the TGP Board is OFF.

5. Turn ON the ‘Control’ switch at the Gantry rear base.

6. Turn ON the service switch on the Sub–Board. The Gantry might rotate very slowly due to the take up cable’s
weight.

Note
The Gantry is normally held by the mechanical brake on the motor. The service switch ON releases
brake, allowing the Gantry to be rotated by hand easily.

7. Verify that there is a LIMIT BALL in the Gantry (use flash–light if necessary).

Illustration 2–1 Limit Ball

Limit Ball

2–1 GANTRY
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-1 SAFETY CHECK (continued)


8. Rotate the Gantry in the CCW direction by hands until CCWR limit switch is activated.

Verify that the GLIMIT LED on the TGP board is ON.


(If the LIMIT BALL remains trapped by the limit switch, release the limit switch by pushing the LIMIT BALL down.)

9. Release the mechanical lock on the limit switch by pushing the release button.

Verify that the limit switch is self–locked mechanically by listening sound when pushing the release button.

10. Rotate the Gantry in the CW direction by hands until the HOME position.

Turn OFF the ‘Control’ switch, wait a few seconds, and turn it ON again.

Verify that the GLIMIT LED on the TGP board is OFF.

11. Repeat the steps 9. ∼ 10. for CW direction.

Illustration 2–2 Limit Switch

Limit Switch

2–2 GANTRY
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-1 SAFETY CHECK (continued)


12. Rotate the Gantry until the x–ray tube reaches the 6 o’clock position.

13. Push ON the cable switch. This switch detects if the take up cable is loose.

Verify that the GLIMIT LED on the TGP board is ON.

14. Turn OFF the ‘Control’ switch, wait a few seconds, and turn it ON again.

Verify that the GLIMIT LED on the TGP board is OFF.

15. Turn OFF the service switch on the Sub–Board.

Illustration 2–3 Take–Up Cable Switch

Take–Up Cable Switch

2–3 GANTRY
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-2 G. PULSE
1. Preparation:

a. Turn OFF the ‘Scan’ and ‘TBL/Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.

b. Remove the front and both side covers.

c. Turn ON the service switch on the Sub–Board.

d. Rotate the Gantry until the x–ray tube reaches the 12 o’clock position by hand.

e. Turn OFF the service switch on the Sub–Board.

2. Connect the oscilloscope probe to TP–G.PLS (location 8J) on the TGP board.

3. Attach a clinometer to the inner collimator face (see illustration 2–4).

Illustration 2–4 Clinometer Attachment

Clinometer

2–4 GANTRY
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-2 G. PULSE (continued)


4. Turn ON the service switch on the Sub–Board, and rotate the Gantry by hand until 5 volts pulse (G.PLS) appears.

5. Measure the angle of the collimator face using the clinometer, and verify that the angle is 0 ± 0.5 deg.

If the angle is out of this range, perform the following:

a. Position the Gantry to a 0 ± 0.5 deg. angle.

b. Turn OFF the service switch on the Sub–Board.

c. Adjust the positions of the G.PLS plate so that the photo sensor rests in the center of the plate.
(Verify that 5 volts pulse (G.PLS) appears.)

d. Turn ON the service switch on the Sub–Board.

e. Rotate the Gantry between about –20° to +20°, and verify that the plate does not touch the photo sensor.

6. Turn OFF the service switch on the Sub–Board.

7. Remove the clinometer, and restore the Gantry to original configuration.

Illustration 2–5 Location of Photo Sensor

Gantry Gantry
Rotational Stationary

Photo Sensor

G_Pulse Plate

2–5 GANTRY
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-3 CWR/CCWR PHOTO SENSOR


1. Preparation:

a. Turn OFF the ‘Scan’ and ‘TBL/Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.

b. Remove the front and both side covers.

c. Turn ON the service switch on the Sub–Board.

d. Rotate the Gantry until the x–ray tube reaches the 12 o’clock position by hand.

e. Turn OFF the service switch on the Sub–Board.

2. Attach a clinometer to the inner collimator face (see illustration 2–4).

3. Turn ON the service switch, and rotate the Gantry by hand until lit ‘CCWR’ LED on the TGP board just turns OFF.

4. Turn OFF the service switch, and measure the angle of the collimator face using the clinometer, and verify that
the angle is 10 ± 5 deg.

If the angle is out of this range, perform the following:

a. Turn ON the service switch, and rotate the Gantry until the x–ray tube reaches the 10 deg. position by hand.

b. Turn OFF the service switch, and remove the Gantry rear cover and protect cover.

c. Loosen the set screw that fasten the CCWR slit plate to the shaft of the gear box.

d. Turn the CCWR slit until the LED in the photo sensor (or ‘CCWR’ LED on the TGP board) just turns on.

e. Screw the set screw until tight.

Illustration 2–6 Photo Sensor and CWR/CCWR Slit Position

CCWR Photo Sensor CWR Photo Sensor CCWR Photo Sensor


CWR Photo Sensor

LED

Gear Box

CWR Slit CCWR Slit

CWR Slit
CWR Position : 350° CCWR Position : 10°
CCWR Slit

2–6 GANTRY
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-3 CWR/CCWR PHOTO SENSOR (continued)


5. Turn ON the service switch, and rotate the Gantry until the x–ray tube reaches the 0 o’clock position by hand.

Verify that the ‘CCWR’ LED is ON, and ‘CWR’ LED is OFF.

6. Rotate the Gantry by hand until lit ‘CWR’ LED on the TGP board just turns ON.

7. Turn OFF the service switch, and measure the angle of the collimator face using the clinometer, and verify that
the angle is 350 ± 5 deg.

If the angle is out of this range, perform the following:

a. Turn ON the service switch, and rotate the Gantry until the x–ray tube reaches the 350 deg. position by hand.

b. Turn OFF the service switch, and remove the Gantry rear cover and protect cover (if necessary).

c. Loosen the set screw that fasten the CWR slit plate to the shaft of the gear box.

d. Turn the CWR slit until the LED in the photo sensor (or ‘CWR’ LED on the TGP board) just turns on.

e. Screw the set screw until tight.

8. Repeat steps 3. through 7., and verify that the Gantry position is in specification.

9. Remove the clinometer, and restore the Gantry to original configuration.

Illustration 2–7 CCWR, CWR, G.Pulse Timing Chart

CCWR

CWR

G.Pulse

5° ∼ 15° 5° ∼ 15°

0° 360°

2–7 GANTRY
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-4 MANUAL ROTATION


1. Preparation:

a. Turn OFF the ‘Scan’ and ‘TBL/Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.

b. Remove the front, rear, and both side covers.

2. Attach a clinometer to the inner collimator face (see illustration 2–4).

3. Check CCW rotation:

a. Turn ON the service switch on the Sub–Board.

b. Rotate the Gantry in the CCW direction by hand until the CCWR limit switch is activated.

c. Verify that the ‘GLIMIT’ LED on the TGP board is ON, and that the limit switch is self locked mechanically.
(When the limit switch is released, you may listen he click sound.)

d. Turn OFF the service switch, and measure the angle of the collimator face using the clinometer.
It should be –78° ± 1°.

e. Turn ON the service switch, and rotate the Gantry further in the CCW direction until stops at mechanical
stopper.

f. Turn OFF the service switch, and measure the angle of the collimator face using the clinometer.
It should be –85° ± 1°.

4. Check CW rotation:

a. Turn ON the service switch on the Sub–Board.

b. Rotate the Gantry in the CW direction by hand until the CWR limit switch is activated.

c. Verify that the ‘GLIMIT’ LED on the TGP board is ON, and that the limit switch is self locked mechanically.
(When the limit switch is released, you may listen he click sound.)

d. Turn OFF the service switch, and measure the angle of the collimator face using the clinometer.
It should be 438° ± 1°.

e. Turn ON the service switch, and rotate the Gantry further in the CW direction until stops at mechanical
stopper.

f. Turn OFF the service switch, and measure the angle of the collimator face using the clinometer.
It should be 445° ± 1°.

2–8 GANTRY
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-4 MANUAL ROTATION (continued)


5. Turn ON the service switch, and rotate the Gantry by hands to the home position.
(If the limit ball remains lodged in the limit switch, release it by pushing it down.)

6. Release the mechanical lock on limit switch by pushing the button of the limit switch.

7. Turn OFF the ‘Control’ switch, wait a few seconds and turn it ON.

Verify that the ‘GLIMIT’ LED on the TGP board is OFF.

8. Remove the clinometer, and restore the Gantry to original configuration.

Illustration 2–8 Azimuth Limit Position

Home

–75° : For System with Table 2109042 435° : For System with Table 2109042
–71° : For System with Table P9155AF CCW CW 431° : For System with Table P9155AF

CCW Fast Rest CW Fast Rest


CCWR Limit SW –78° 438° CCWR Limit SW
Mech Stopper –85° 445° Mech Stopper

CW Fast

180°
X–Ray
Tube

2–9 GANTRY
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-5 CABLE TAKE–UP


Perform this adjustment after repairing problems with, or replacing cables in the take–up mechanism.

1. Preparation:

a. Set Gantry to the 0° tilt and home position using the Gantry control panel.

b. Turn OFF the ‘Scan’ and ‘TBL/Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.

c. Remove the front and rear covers from the Gantry.

2. Set the TGP board SYS/OFF/MNL switch to the OFF position.

3. Remove the Clear Plastic (Plexiglass/Acryl) cover from the cable take–up drum (6 screws and 2 nuts).

4. Verify that the metal bar, HV cable clamp and rotor cable clamp make contact with each other 1∼2 mm space.

If the cable/clamp bar alignment is not 1∼2 mm space, adjust the clamp position as follows:

a. Loosen the two clamp screws.

b. Slid the clamp until 1∼2 mm space exists between any of the clamp and metal bars.

c. Fasten the two clamp screws.

Illustration 2–9 Cable Take–Up Mechanism

Cable Take–Up Rear View


(5 o’clock Tube Position)

There must be
1∼2mm space.

Metal Bar

Clamp for HV Cables


CCW
Clamp for Rotor Cables

2–10 GANTRY
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-5 CABLE TAKE–UP (continued)


5. Turn ON the ‘Scan’ switch at the Gantry rear base.

6. Rotate the Gantry in manual mode, and verify the rotates correctly.

Note

D During CCW rotation, the metal bar pushes out the HV cable clamp, then the HV cable clamp pushes out
the rotor cable clamp.

D One clamp must not ride up onto another clamp or metal bar and 1 ∼ 2 mm space must exist anywhere
between claps or metal bars. If these conditions are not satisfied, the HV cable will slide off the drum during
CCW rotation.

7. Set the TGP board SYS/OFF/MNL switch to the ON position, and restore the Gantry to original configuration.

2–11 GANTRY
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-6 AZIMUTH BELT TENSION


1. Preparation:

a. Turn OFF the ‘Scan’ and ‘TBL/Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.

b. Remove the rear and both side covers from the Gantry.

2. Remove the gear box cover.

NOTICE

Over tension Hazard !


After part A and Part B have just touched, DO NOT rotate the adjusting bolt further. This will
cause over tension and will shorten the lift of the axial drive belt.

3. Adjust the azimuth belt tension as follows:

a. Loosen 3 mounting bolts that fasten the axial motor plate to the Gantry frame.

b. Rotate the adjusting bolt in the CCW direction until distance between parts A and B becomes approximately
2∼3mm.

c. Rotate the adjusting screw in the CW direction until the contact surface between parts A and B just touches
(space D=0).

d. Tighten 3 mounting bolts.

4. Restore the Gantry to original configuration.

Illustration 2–10 Belt Tension Adjuster

Axial Drive Belt

Mounting Bolt
(x3)

A
B

Adjusting
Bolt
D:Just Touch

2–12 GANTRY
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-7 GANTRY GEAR/PULLEY ASSEMBLY


Perform this adjustment if the gear’s up/down displacement is more than 0.3mm.

1. Preparation:

a. Turn OFF the ‘Scan’ and ‘TBL/Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.

b. Remove the rear and both side covers from the Gantry.

2. Remove the gear box cover.

3. Unscrew 6 bolts that fasten the gear to the motor shaft.

4. Pull out the rear gently. Verify that the motor shaft has no flaws and is not damaged.

Illustration 2–11 Removal of Gear

Pulley

Allen Screws

2–13 GANTRY
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-7 GANTRY GEAR/PULLEY ASSEMBLY (continued)


5. Install the gear and progressively tighten the 6 pully socket bolts in a gradual, crisscross pattern.

a. Tighten each screw with 15Kgcm torque.

b. Tighten each screw with 30Kgcm torque.

c. Tighten each screw with 40Kgcm torque.

Illustration 2–12 Gear Tightening

1
Gear 5

4
3
6
2

6. Rotate the Gantry by hand while verifying, using a dial gage, that the vertical displacement of the gear is less
than 0.3mm (see illustration 2–13).

If this measurements are out of tolerance, repeat all the procedure from step 3.

7. Restore the Gantry to original configuration.

Illustration 2–13 Displacement of the Gear

less than 0.3mm


ÚÚÚ
ÚÚÚ
ÚÚÚ

2–14 GANTRY
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

SECTION 3 – ROTATIONAL OPERATION

3-1 TGP BOARD INITIAL CHECK


1. Preparation:

a. Turn OFF the ‘Scan’ switch at the Gantry rear base.

b. Remove the left side cover to access the TGP board.

2. Set the TGP service switch SYS/OFF/MNL to OFF.

3. Turn OFF the ‘Control’ switch at the Gantry rear base, and turn ON it.

Wait 10 seconds and then verify that the Loop A and Loop B LEDs start blinking and that all red LEDs except
ERRA are not ON.

4. Repeat step 3. after pressing the ‘Rest’ switch on the TGP board.

5. Set the TGP service switch SYS/OFF/MNL to SYS.

6. Restore the Gantry to original configuration.

3–1 GANTRY
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

3-2 GANTRY INITIALIZE MOVEMENT


1. Preparation:

a. Turn OFF the ‘Scan’, ‘TBL/Tilt’ and ‘Control’ switches at the Gantry rear base.

b. Remove the left side Gantry cover.

c. For System with Table P9155AF ONLY:


Verify that the servo–amp breaker is turned ON.

2. Set the TGP service switch to OFF / FIX / SLOW / HOME position.

DANGER!!
FATAL COLLISION HAZARD!!
WHEN ‘CONTROL’ SWITCH LOCATED ON THE GANTRY REAR BASE IS
TURNED ON (WITH THE ‘SCAN’ SWITCH ON), THE GANTRY WILL ROTATE
DUE TO INITIALIZATION.

3. Turn ON the ‘Scan’, ‘TBL/Tilt’ and ‘Control’ switches sequentially.

Note
The ‘Scan’ and ‘TBL/Tilt’ switches must be turned ON before turning ‘Control’ switch ON. The
switches turning ON sequence is as follows:
‘Scan’ ON ––> ‘TBL/Tilt’ ON ––> ‘Control’ ON

The ‘DAS/Det’ switch ca be turned ON any time.

Verify that the Gantry display shows the Test sequence pattern (see illustration 3–1).

4. Set the TGP service switch SYS/OFF/MNL to SYS.

When the Gantry position ‘CCWR’ LED on TGP board is ON:


Verify that Gantry rotates to the 10° position (CW), the –21° (CCW) position, and then stops at 0° (HOME).

When the Gantry option ‘CCWR’ LED on TGP board is OFF:


Verify that Gantry rotates to the –21° (CCW), and then stops at 0° (HOME).

Note
The same initialization sequence can be done by pressing the REST button on the TGP board.

5. Restore the Gantry to original configuration.

3–2 GANTRY
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

3-2 GANTRY INITIALIZE MOVEMENT (continued)

Illustration 3–1 Gantry Initialize Display

Gantry Display Gantry Switch

Pth FWD BWD D8 D7 D6 Posn Hgn D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 Up Down In

10

11

3–3 GANTRY
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

3-3 MOVEMENT CHECK


1. Preparation:

a. Turn OFF the ‘Scan’, ‘TBL/Tilt’ and ‘Control’ switches at the Gantry rear base.

b. Remove the left side Gantry cover.

DANGER!!
FATAL COLLISION HAZARD!!
WHEN ‘CONTROL’ SWITCH LOCATED ON THE GANTRY REAR BASE IS
TURNED ON (WITH THE ‘SCAN’ SWITCH ON), THE GANTRY WILL ROTATE
DUE TO INITIALIZATION.

2. Turn ON the ‘Scan’, ‘TBL/Tilt’ and ‘Control’ switches sequentially.

Note
The ‘Scan’ and ‘TBL/Tilt’ switches must be turned ON before turning ‘Control’ switch ON. The
switches turning ON sequence is as follows:
‘Scan’ ON ––> ‘TBL/Tilt’ ON ––> ‘Control’ ON

The ‘DAS/Det’ switch ca be turned ON any time.

3. Set the TGP service switch to MNL / SVE / SLOW / CW position.

Verify that the ‘SVE’ LED on the TGP board is ON.

4. Set the ABT/SVE/FIX switch to ABT, and keep it pressed until the Gantry stops (Gantry at 435° position).
(For CT Sytec 2000i, S with Table P9155AF: Gantry at 431° position.)

Verify that the Gantry rotates smoothly, and there is no abnormal noise.

5. Do the same check above for each of the following settings.

TGP Service Switch


SYS/OFF/MNL ABT/SVE/FIX FAST/MID/SLOW CCW/HOME/CW
MNL ABT SLOW CCW
MNL FIX SLOW CW
MNL FIX SLOW CCW
MNL FIX MID CW
MNL FIX MID CCW

6. Set the TGP service switch SYS/OFF/MNL to SYS.

7. Restore the Gantry to original configuration.

3–4 GANTRY
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

3-4 ROTATION JITTER CHECK


1. Preparation:

a. Turn OFF the ‘Scan’ switch at the Gantry rear base.

b. Remove the left side cover to access the TGP board.

c. Turn ON the ‘Scan’ switch at the Gantry rear base.

2. Set the TGP service switch to MNL / SVE / SLOW / CW position.

3. Connect the oscilloscope probes to TP10D (GP) – DGND on the TGP board.

4. Verify that the jitter during steady rotation is within specification (see illustration 3–2).

5. Set the TGP service switch SYS/OFF/MNL to SYS.

6. Restore the Gantry to original configuration.

Illustration 3–2 Rotation Jitter and GP Specification

Jitter Width

GP Period

GP Specification
CT Sytec 2000i, S CT Sytec, 3000i, 4000i, Plus
Speed Direction GP Jitter Speed Direction GP Jitter
Period Period
FAST FAST CW
– – – 128 µsec ± 10%
CCW
MID CW MID CW
256 µsec ± 10% 192 µsec ± 10%
CCW CCW
SLOW SLOW CW
– – – 320 µsec ± 10%
CCW

3–5 GANTRY
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

3-5 D/A CONVERTER OFFSET


1. Preparation:

a. Turn OFF the ‘Scan’ switch at the Gantry rear base.

b. Remove the left side cover to access the TGP board.

c. Turn ON the ‘Scan’ switch at the Gantry rear base.

2. Set the TGP service switches as described below:

SYS/OFF/MNL : MNL
ABT/SVE/FIX : SVE
FAST/MID/SLOW : MID
CCW/HOME/CW : HOME

3. Connect the oscilloscope probes to TP VOUT – AGND on the TGP board.

4. Adjust ZERO on the TGP board to 0 ± 50mV.

5. Set the TGP service switch SYS/OFF/MNL to SYS.

6. Restore the Gantry to original configuration.

3–6 GANTRY
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

3-6 ROTATION VELOCITY OFFSET


1. Preparation:

a. Turn OFF the ‘Scan’ and ‘TBL/Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.

b. Remove the front and both side covers from the Gantry.

2. Attach a clinometer to the inner collimator face.

3. Turn ON the ‘Scan’ and ‘TBL/Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.

4. Set the TGP service switches as described below:

SYS/OFF/MNL : MNL
ABT/SVE/FIX : FIX
FAST/MID/SLOW : MID
CCW/HOME/CW : HOME

5. Verify that the Gantry does not drift more than ± 0.5° in 1 minute.

If Gantry drifts more than ± 0.5°, adjust VZERO on the TGP board.

For System with Table P9155AF:


If VZERO cannot control the drift, adjust VR1 on the Servo–Amp.

6. Set the TGP service switch SYS/OFF/MNL to SYS.

7. Restore the Gantry to original configuration.

3–7 GANTRY
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

3-7 ROTATION VELOCITY GAIN (ROTATION SPEED)


1. Preparation:

a. Turn OFF the ‘Scan’ switch at the Gantry rear base.

b. Remove the left side cover to access the TGP board.

c. Turn ON the ‘Scan’ switch at the Gantry rear base.

2. Enter the TGP off–line function #401 (Gantry rotation speed display mode):

a. Set the Dip switch S6 (location 7N) to ON on the TGP board.

b. Push the REST button on the TGP board.

The Gantry rotates to the HOME position, and the Gantry Display panel displays a test number 400.

c. Push the TEST A switch once on the TGP board. The Gantry Display will change from 400 to 401.

d. Set the Dip switch S3 (location 7N) to ON.

3. Rotate the Gantry at a specified speed and check/adjust the Gantry rotation speed displayed on the Gantry Dis-
play.

a. Set the TGP service switches as follows to rotate the Gantry to CCW Rest position.

SYS/OFF/MNL : OFF ↓
ABT/SVE/FIX : FIX ↓
FAST/MID/SLOW : FAST ↓
CCW/HOME/CW : CCW ↓
SYS/OFF/MNL : MNL

b. Set the TGP service switches as follows to rotate the Gantry to CW Rest position.

SYS/OFF/MNL : OFF ↓
ABT/SVE/FIX : FIX ↓
FAST/MID/SLOW : FAST ↓
CCW/HOME/CW : CW ↓
SYS/OFF/MNL : MNL

c. Verify that the speed value displayed is within the following range: 0183 ± 3% (0177∼0188)

If not, adjust VGAIN (location 9X on the TGP board).

d. Perform the above check/adjustment for CCW Gantry rotation.

4. Set the TGP service switch SYS/OFF/MNL to SYS.

5. Set the S6 and S3 Dip switches to OFF, and press the REST switch on the TGP board.

6. Restore the Gantry to original configuration.

3–8 GANTRY
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

3-8 RAMP TIME


1. Preparation:

a. Turn OFF the ‘Scan’ switch at the Gantry rear base.

b. Remove the left side cover to access the TGP board.

c. Turn ON the ‘Scan’ switch at the Gantry rear base.

2. Connect an oscilloscope probes to VOUT (location 9X) – AGND on the TGP board.

3. Rotate the Gantry from the CCW Rest to CW Rest position and check/adjust the Gantry rotation Ramp Time.

a. Set the TGP service switches as follows to rotate the Gantry from the CCW Rest to CW Rest position.

OFF / FIX / FAST / CCW ↓


MNL / FIX / FAST / CCW ↓
OFF / FIX / FAST / CW ↓
MNL / FIX / FAST / CW

b. Verify that the Gantry does not overshoot the Rest position (see illustration ).

If not, adjust the VR5 on the Servo–Amp for the shortest Ramp Time without the Gantry overshooting.

c. Perform the above check/adjustment for CCW Gantry rotation.

4. Set the TGP service switch SYS/OFF/MNL to SYS.

5. Restore the Gantry to original configuration.

Illustration 3–3 Ramp Time

Adjust until any overshoot or


undershoot disappears.

CW Overshoot

Ramp Time CCW

D If VR5 is turned to far CCW, the Gantry will hit and activate the limit switch.
D Set VR5 on the Servo–Amp to mid–range to prevent overruns when you replace the Servo–Amp.
D Check Gantry velocity again, if VR5 is adjusted.

3–9 GANTRY
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
blank 2234976

3–10 GANTRY
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

SECTION 4 – TILT OPERATION

4-1 ROTATION CHECK WITH TILTED


1. Remove the left side cover to access the TGP board.

2. Move the cradle to the furthest (Out) position from the Gantry.

3. Set the Table height to approximately ‘–100mm’ according to the Gantry Display.

4. Push the Gantry switch ‘FWD’. Verify that the Gantry tilts to the FWD 25° position safely.

5. Rotate the Gantry while in the FWD 25° tilt position using the MNL, ABT/FIX, SLOW/MID/FAST, CW/CCW
service switches on the TGP board.

Verify that no abnormal movement occurs during rotation.

6. Push the Gantry switch ‘BWD’. Verify that the Gantry tilts to the BWD 25° position safely.

7. Rotate the Gantry while in the BWD 25° tilt position using the MNL, ABT/FIX, SLOW/MID/FAST, CW/CCW
service switches on the TGP board.

Verify that no abnormal movement occurs during rotation.

8. Set the TGP service switch SYS/OFF/MNL to SYS.

9. Restore the Gantry to original configuration.

4–1 GANTRY
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

4-2 TILT GUIDE ROLLERS


1. Turn OFF the ‘Scan’ and ‘TBL/Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.

2. Remove the front, rear and both side covers from the Gantry.

3. Turn ON the ‘TBL/Tilt’ switch at the Gantry rear base.

4. Verify that the guide rollers can be freely rotated by hand with a gap of approximately 0.5 mm at every tilt angle
from FWD 25° to BWD 25°.

If the rollers are not free at every angle, perform the following adjustment.

a. Turn OFF the ‘TBL/Tilt’ switch at the Gantry rear base.

b. Loosen the main nuts of each guide roller, except for the front left guide roller, which is not adjustable.

c. Manually move the complete Gantry tilting frame assy, such that the arched frame just touches the front left
guide roller, but also such that the front left guide roller can still be rotated by hand.

d. Adjust the three guide rollers (front right, rear right and rear left) such that the gap between the rollers and
arched frames is approximately 0.5 mm.

e. Fix the rollers by tightening their main nuts.

f. Turn OFF the ‘TBL/Tilt’ switch at the Gantry rear base.

g. Verify that the rollers can be rotated by hand at every tilt angle. If not, repeat steps a. through f.

5. Restore the Gantry to original configuration.

Illustration 4–1 Tilt Guide Roller

Arched Frame

Roller

Arched
Frame

Front Left
Guide Roller

Side Plate Approximately


0.5 mm

4–2 GANTRY
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

4-3 TILT ROLLERS


1. Turn OFF the ‘Scan’ and ‘TBL/Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.

2. Remove the front, rear and both side covers from the Gantry.

3. Turn ON the ‘TBL/Tilt’ switch at the Gantry rear base.

4. Verify that the four tilt rollers rotate along with the arched frames during tilt operation.

If not, perform the following adjustment.

a. Turn OFF the ‘TBL/Tilt’ switch at the Gantry rear base.

b. Loosen the upper roller Lock Nuts (A) on the both sides of the Gantry.

c. Loosen the set nuts for the Adjusting Bolts (E) on the both sides of the Gantry, and loosen the Adjusting Bolts.

d. Loosen Lock Nut (B) on the right side only.

e. Adjust the right under front roller by the Adjusting Bolt (D) such that the four tilt rollers rotate during tilt opera-
tions but also such that the rollers do not rotate when you try to rotate them by hand.

f. Tighten the Lock Nut (B). (approximately 930kg.cm torque)

g. Tighten the upper roller Lock Nuts (A) slightly on both sides of the Gantry.

h. Tighten the Adjusting Bolt (E) on both sides of the Gantry until you can barely rotate the upper rollers by hand.

i. Tighten the set nuts for (E) and (D) on both sides of the Gantry.

5. Restore the Gantry to original configuration.

Illustration 4–2 Tilt Rollers

(A):Right Upper Roller


(E):Adjusting Bolt of
Right Upper Roller

Lock Nut

(B):Right Under Front Roller

(C):Right Upper Rear Roller

(D):Adjusting Bolt of
Right Under Front Roller

4–3 GANTRY
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

4-4 TILT SPEED

Tilt Speed Check


1. Verify that all the Gantry covers are installed.

2. Move the cradle to the furthest (Out) position from the Gantry.

3. Set the Table height to approximately ‘–100mm’ according to the Gantry Display.

4. Measure the time from BWD 25 deg. to FWD 25 deg., and from FWD 25 deg. to BWD 25 deg. Verify that their
values are in the following specified ranges:

Table 4–1 Tilt Speed Specification

Operation Time
From BWD 25 deg. to FWD 25 deg. 30 ± 3 sec
From FWD 25 deg. to BWD 25 deg. 30 ± 3 sec

4–4 GANTRY
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

4-4 TILT SPEED (continued)

Tilt Speed Adjustment


If the time is out of the specified range, perform the procedure below.

5. Set the hydraulic valve adjusters to initial values:

a. Turn OFF the ‘Scan’ and ‘TBL/Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.

b. Remove the lower access cover from the Gantry front cover.

c. Remove the cover of the hydraulic valve adjuster.

d. Rotate the four adjusters (LEFT–RWD, LEFT–BWD, RIGHT–FWD, RIGHT–BWD) to the CW limit (S limit).

e. Rotate the four adjusters CCW to he adjuster intervals shown in Table 4–2.

f. Turn ON the ‘Scan’ and ‘TBL/Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.

Illustration 4–3 Hydraulic Valve Adjuster

F : FAST
S: SLOW

LEFT RIGHT
S F

S
F BWD

Lower Access S F
Cover
S
F FWD

Table 4–2 Initial Setting Value

Left FWD Left BWD Right FWD Right BWD


12 ± 0.5 4.5 ± 0.5 12 ± 0.5 4.5 ± 0.5
These numbers equal the number of intervals from the CW direction (S) limit.

4–5 GANTRY
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

4-4 TILT SPEED (continued)

NOTICE

Overtension. When changing the adjuster positions, make sure that you shift the right and
left adjusters the same distance and direction. If not, the Gantry right and left frame applied
torque could become unbalanced and the frame could be bent.

6. Adjust the LEFT–FWD and RIGHT–FWD adjusters:

a. Measure the time of movement from BWD 25 deg. to FWD 25 deg.

b. If the time is out of specification, rotate the LEFT–FWD and RIGHT–FWD adjusters as follows:

D If the time is less than 27 sec, rotate the adjusters for 1.0 scale interval in the CW (S) direction.

D If the time is more than 33 sec, rotate the adjusters for 1.0 scale interval in the CCW (F) direction.

c. Repeat steps a. and b, until the time equals 30 ± 3 sec.

7. Adjust the LEFT–BWD and RIGHT–BWD adjusters:

a. Measure the time of movement from FWD 25 deg. to BWD 25 deg.

b. If the time is out of specification, rotate the LEFT–BWD and RIGHT–BWD adjusters as follows:

D If the time is less than 27 sec, rotate the adjusters for 1/5 of a scale interval in the CW (S) direction.

D If the time is more than 33 sec, rotate the adjusters for 1/5 of a scale interval in the CCW (F) direction.

c. Repeat steps a. and b, until the time equals 30 ± 3 sec.

8. Mark the final adjusted positions.

9. Install the cover of the hydraulic valve adjuster.

10. Install the lower access cover.

4–6 GANTRY
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

4-5 TILT ANGLE

Tilt Angle Check


1. Turn OFF the ‘Scan’ and ‘TBL/Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.

2. Remove the front and both side covers from the Gantry.

3. Attach a clinometer to the inner collimator face

4. Turn ON the ‘TBL/Tilt’ switch at the Gantry rear base.

5. Set the Table height to approximately ‘–100mm’ according to the Gantry Display.

6. Press the ‘FWD’ button continually until the Gantry tilt to the 25° position.

7. Measure the Gantry tilt angle using clinometer.

Verify that the tilt angle is 25 ± 1° and that the Tilt Display shows ‘FWD 25.0’.

8. Continually press ‘BWD’ button until the Gantry stops.

Verify that the Gantry stops at the 0° tilt position and the Tilt Display shows ‘0’.

9. Free the ‘BWD’ button, and then press it again until the Gantry tilts to –25° position.

10. Measure the Gantry tilt angle using clinometer.

Verify that the tilt angle is –25 ± 1° and that the Tilt Display shows ‘BWD 25.0’.

4–7 GANTRY
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

4-5 TILT ANGLE (continued)

Tilt Angle Adjustment


If the tilt angle is out of the specified range, preform the procedure below.

11. Raise the Table to its highest position.

12. Enter the TGP off–line function #002 (Gantry tilt angle display mode):

a. Set the S14 Gantry dip switch to ON on the TGP board.

b. Push the ‘TEST B’ button twice. The Gantry display will change from 000 to 002.

13. Adjust the FWD 25° position:

a. Tilt the Gantry FWD 25 ± 0.2° measured using a clinometer.

If the FWD tilt limit is reached (the Gantry tilt reads ‘0000’ and stops) before the Gantry is tilted FWD 25°, turn
the variable register T0 on the TGP board in the CW direction to increase the tilt reading, and then continue to
tilt the Gantry to FWD 25 ± 0.2°.

When the Gantry is tilted FWD 25 ± 0.2°, adjust T0 to read ‘0005’ on the Gantry Display.

14. Adjust the BWD 25° position:

a. Tilt the Gantry BWD 25 ± 0.2° measured using a clinometer.

If the BWD tilt limit is reached (the Gantry tilt reads ‘0505’ and stops) before the Gantry is tilted BWD 25°, turn
the variable register TG on the TGP board in the CCW direction to decrease the tilt reading, and then continue
to tilt the Gantry to BWD 25 ± 0.2°.

When the Gantry is tilted BWD 25 ± 0.2°, adjust TG to read ‘0505’ on the Gantry Display.

15. Set the S14 Gantry dip switch to OFF on the TGP board.

16. Push the Reset switch of the TGP board.

17. Restore the Gantry to original configuration.

4–8 GANTRY
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

SECTION 5 – COLLIMATOR

5-1 APERTURE RATIO


1. Perform Off–Line scans :

a. Select Support menu from the Maintenance menu.

b. Select Off Line Scan from the Support menu, and perform the following stationary scans:

Series Scan Parameters


No
No.
Azimuth Time Direction Thickness Scan Recon KV mA
FOV FOV
1 0 Note1 CW 10 25 20 120 40
2 0 Note1 CW 5 25 20 120 40
3 0 Note1 CW 3 25 20 120 40
4 0 Note1 CW 1 25 20 120 40
Bow–tie Filter: Installed
Note1 :3.6 sec (CT Sytec 2000i, S)
:4.5 sec (CT Sytec, 3000i, 4000i, Plus)

2. Obtain Mean Files from the acquired raw data:

a. Select Statistics from the Support menu.

b. Enter 1 (2, 3, and 4) for the raw data file ID No.

c. Select Fan from the Raw Data Format menu.

d. Select as follows:

OFFSET FILE CORRECTION :(Yes)


REFERENCE CH. CORRECTION :(No)
NATURAL LOG. CONVERSION :(No)

e. Select Mean from the Kind of Data menu.

f. Select Store File.

g. Enter 1 (2, 3, and 4) as the Mean File No.

5–1 GANTRY
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

5-1 APERTURE RATIO (continued)


3. Perform division operations, and check the aperture ratio.

a. Select Calculation with Mean File from the Support menu.

b. Select File1 / File2.

c. Enter 2 for File1.

d. Enter 1 for File2.

e. Select Display.

Verify that the value of Ref. channels (636∼679ch) are within the specifications listed in Table 5–1.

Table 5–1 Thickness Ratio

Ratio Specification
5/10 mm 0.5 ± 0.05
3/10 mm 0.3 ± 0.03
2/10 mm 0.2 ± 0.03
1/10 mm 0.13 ± 0.03

4. Repeat above step for 3mm, (2mm), 1mm.

5. Check the aperture ratio using Support Display.

5–2 GANTRY
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

5-2 BOW–TIE FILTER CURVE TEST


Prerequisites for this test are as follows:

D The x–ray alignment (Plane of Rotation, Detector Beam–on Window, ISO Center Alignment, and Filter
Center Alignment) is proper.

D The Table/Gantry subsystem alignment is proper.

D The DET/DAS has been powered ON for more than 2 hours.

1. Preparation:

a. Turn OFF the ‘Scan’ and ‘TBL/Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.

b. Remove the front and both side covers from the Gantry.

c. Turn ON the ‘Scan’ and ‘TBL/Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.

2. Perform 2 air scans with the filter installed and removed:

a. Select Support menu from the Maintenance menu.

b. Select Off Line Scan from the Support menu, and perform the following air scans:
(Turn OFF the ‘Scan’ switch prior to removing the filter)

Scan 1 Scan 2
Scan Time : Note1 Scan Time : Note1
CW/CCW : CCW CW/CCW : CW
Thickness : 10.0 mm Thickness : 10.0 mm
Scan FOV : 25 cm Scan FOV : 25 cm
Recon FOV : 25.0 cm Recon FOV : 25.0 cm
XG Rotor : XG ON XG Rotor : XG ON
KV : 120 KV KV : 120 KV
mA : 40 mA mA : 40 mA
Filter : Installed Filter : Removed
Note1 :3.6 sec (CT Sytec 2000i, S)
:4.5 sec (CT Sytec, 3000i, 4000i, Plus)

5–3 GANTRY
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

5-2 BOW–TIE FILTER CURVE TEST (continued)


3. Obtain Mean Files from the acquired raw data:

a. Select Statistics from the Support menu.

b. Enter 1 (2) for the raw data file ID No.

c. Select Fan from the Raw Data Format menu.

d. Select as follows:

OFFSET FILE CORRECTION :(Yes)


REFERENCE CH. CORRECTION :(6ch)
NATURAL LOG. CONVERSION :(No)

e. Select Mean from the Kind of Data menu.

f. Select Store File, and enter 1 (2) as the Mean File No.

4. Apply a division to the Mean File No.1 and No.2:

a. Select Calculation with Mean File from the Support menu.

b. Select File1 / File2, and enter 1 for File1, and enter 2 for File2.

c. Select Store File, and enter 3 as the Mean File No.

5. Check the filter curve using Support Display:

a. Select Support Display menu from the Maintenance menu.

b. Select File Selection, and enter the parameters as follows:

Enter FILE NAME = M


RANGE
MAX = 0
MIN = 1000

c. Select Set Cursor, and enter as follows:

1 for Channel
3 for Data

d. Select Profile(H), and enter as follows:

0 for MIN DATA


50 for MAX DATA

A filter curve is drawn, as is shown in illustration 5–1. Check that the curve is smooth.

6. Install the bow–tie filter.

7. Restore the Gantry to original configuration.

5–4 GANTRY
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

5-2 BOW–TIE FILTER CURVE TEST (continued)

Illustration 5–1 Filter Curve

Start Position Start Position


Ch 1 Ch 300
Data 3 Data 3

5–5 GANTRY
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
blank 2234976

5–6 GANTRY
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

SECTION 6 – TABLE AND GANTRY

6-1 TABLE POSITIONING


The following procedure adjusts the Table position in the right–left direction so that the Table center line and the scan
center are aligned. After completing the adjustment, anchor the Table; see the Installation manual.

Illustration 6–1 Table Right–Left Positioning

GANTRY

Scan Center

TABLE

Right–Left
Table Center Line Direction

DANGER!!
X–RAY EXPOSURE !!
IN THIS SECTION, THE X–RAY EXPOSURE IS PERFORMED. ALWAYS VERIFY
THAT NO PEOPLE IS IN THE SCAN ROOM WHENEVER SCAN IS PERFORMED.

WARNING!
ROTATION HAZARD !
TURN OFF THE ‘SCAN’ BREAKER LOCATED AT THE REAR OF THE GANTRY BASE BEFORE
INSERTING ANY OBJECT INTO OR WORKING ON THE GANTRY.

6–1 GANTRY
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

6-1 TABLE POSITIONING (continued)


1. Tilt the Gantry to 0 deg.

2. Perform an axial scan of the head holder:

a. Mount the axial head holder to the end of the cradle.

b. Switch ON the positioning lights.

c. Advance the cradle into the Gantry until the internal light cuts the approximately middle section of the head
holder.

d. Perform an axial scan of the head holder using the following technique:

Scan Parameters: 120KV, 40mA, 10mm THK, 3.6sec (CT Sytec 2000i, S)
2.7sec (CT Sytec 3000i, 4000i, PLUS)

The CRT monitor should display an image of the head holder.

3. Check whether the Table center line and the scan center are aligned:

Verify that the difference in the distances (|1–2|) is within ± 2mm.

If not, proceed to next step.

Illustration 6–2 Head Holder Centering Verification

1 2

6–2 GANTRY
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

6-1 TABLE POSITIONING (continued)


4. Adjust the Table right–left position:

a. Switch OFF the ‘Scan’ and ‘Table/Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.

b. Remove the Table bottom cover.


(Refer to the Component Replacement manual, if necessary)

c. Loosen the Table base mounting Bolts and nuts (see illustration ).

d. Move the table to center the head holder in the scan plane, according to step 3.

e. Tighten the Table base mounting Bolts and nuts securely.

f. Switch ON the ‘Scan’ and ‘Table/Tilt’ switches.

g. Return to step 2.

Illustration 6–3 Table Mounting Bolts and Nuts

Nut (x2)

Gantry Base

Table Base
Mounting Bolt
(x2)

6–3 GANTRY
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

6-2 POSITIONING LIGHT

WARNING!
ROTATION HAZARD!
WHEN YOU PRESS THE ‘POSN LIGNT’ BUTTONS (LARGE BUTTON AND SMALL BUTTON),
THE GANTRY QUICKLY ROTATES TO THE 0° POSITION. IF IT IS NECESSARY TO PLACE ANY
PART OF YOUR BODY INSIDE OR NEAR THE GANTRY, SWITCH OFF THE ‘SCAN’ SWITCH
FIRST.

Preparation
1. Tilt the Gantry to 0 deg.

2. Remove the Gantry front cover.

Focus Check and Adjustment


1. Put a paper in front of the left internal and external positioning lights to cut of their beams.

2. Turn ON the positioning lights.

3. Verify that the right internal and external beams are clear, not fuzzy.

4. Remove the paper from the left internal and external positioning lights, and put a paper in front of the right internal
and external positioning lights to cut off their beams.

5. Turn ON the positioning lights.

6. Verify that the left internal and external beams are clear, not fuzzy.

7. If their beams are not clear, adjust their focus as follows:


(See illustration 6–4)

a. Loosen set screw–A.

b. Slide the lens to adjust the focus.

c. Fasten set screw–A.

8. Remove the paper from the right internal and external positioning lights.

6–4 GANTRY
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

6-2 POSITIONING LIGHT (continued)

Cross Line Check and Adjustment


1. Turn ON the positioning lights.

2. Verify that the 5 cross–hairs(+) are not tilted by using the cradle as a reference.

3. If the cross–hairs are tilted, adjust the slit angle ad follows:

a. Loosen set screw–A.

b. Use the lever to adjust the slit angle.

c. Fasten set screw–A.

Illustration 6–4 Alignment Light Adjustment (1)

Focus
Lever
Set Screw–A
Set Screw–B (for Focus Adjustment)

6–5 GANTRY
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

6-2 POSITIONING LIGHT (continued)

Alignment Light Position Check and Adjustment


1. Position the 35cm phantom horizontally on the cradle until the top surface reaches scan FOV center.
(Verify its position by taking a scan.)

Illustration 6–5 Phantom Position

Cradle

35cm Phantom

6–6 GANTRY
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

6-2 POSITIONING LIGHT (continued)

Alignment Light Position Check and Adjustment (continued)


2. Verify coincidence of the left and right internal beams to within ± 1mm by placing a sheet of paper in the path
(Center of Scan area).

Verify that the horizontal left and right internal beams are positioned at the top surface of the phantom.
If not, adjust the left and right internal beams as follows:

a. Horizontal Beam Alignment:

i. Loosen the securing bolt (A) of the internal alignment light.

ii. Adjust the beam by tilting the light unit.

iii. Fasten the securing bolt (A).

b. Vertical Beam Alignment:

i. Loosen the securing bolt (B) of the internal alignment light.

ii. Adjust the beam by rotating the light unit.

iii. Fasten the securing bolt (B).

Illustration 6–6 Alignment Light Adjustment (2)

Securing Bolt (B)


Securing Bolt (A)

6–7 GANTRY
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

6-2 POSITIONING LIGHT (continued)

Alignment Light Position Check and Adjustment (continued)


3. Tape a Polaroid type 52 film on the phantom, and mark the film’s position on the phantom.

4. Advance the film/phantom into the scan plane as set illustration 6–7, and expose the film to x–ray as follows:

a. Insert the BOOT floppy into the disk drive.

b. Touch the [Maint] key and enter $$ to display the Maintenance menu.

c. Select SUPPORT from the Maintenance menu.

d. Select OFF LINE SCAN from the Support menu.

e. Perform the following stationary scan:

Azimuth : Present Degree


Scan Time : 3.6 sec (CT Sytec 2000i, S)
4.5 sec (CT Sytec 3000i, 4000i, Plus)
Thickness : 10 mm
KV : 120 KV
mA : 80 mA
(Others) : (defaults)

Illustration 6–7 Polaroid Film Position and Internal Beam Coincidence

Left Positioning Beam


35cm Phantom

Film Cradle
Tape
Mark with Pen

Right Positioning Beam

6–8 GANTRY
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

6-2 POSITIONING LIGHT (continued)

Alignment Light Position Check and Adjustment (continued)


5. Develop the film, and return it to its original marked position (see illustration 6–7).

Verify that the slice surface of the positioning lights coincides with the exposed line on the Type 52 film.
The difference should be 1mm or less.
If it is out of specification, adjust the internal positioning light as follows:
(See illustration 6–6)

a. Loosen the securing bolt (A) of the internal alignment light.

b. Adjust the light position by tilting the light unit.

c. Fasten the securing bolt (A).

6. Verify that the left and right beams of the external alignment lights are coincident with each other as with the
internal beams (refer to step 2.).

7. Press ‘Zero’ button to set the Gantry Display to 0mm, and move the cradle until the Gantry Display reads 175mm.

Verify that the slice surface of the positioning lights coincides with the exposed line on the Type 52 film.
The difference should be 1mm or less.
If it is out of specification, adjust the external positioning light as follows:

a. Loosen the securing bolt (A) of the external alignment light.

b. Adjust the light position by tilting the light unit.

c. Fasten the securing bolt (A).

8. Set the 35cm phantom on the phantom holder, and use the calibration function to center the 35cm phantom in
the scan FOV.

Verify that the Gantry is at 0° azimuth position.

Verify that left and right bean meet horizontally at the phantom center line ± 1mm.
If not, adjust the internal positioning light as follows:
(See illustration 6–6)

a. Loosen the securing bolt (B) of the internal alignment light.

b. Adjust the light position by moving the light unit.

c. Fasten the securing bolt (B).

6–9 GANTRY
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

6-2 POSITIONING LIGHT (continued)

Alignment Light Position Check and Adjustment (continued)


9. Retract the centered 35cm phantom 175mm from the scan plane to an external reference and verify correct align-
ment light position. (Phantom center line ± 1mm)

If alignment is incorrect, adjust the external positioning light as follows:


(See illustration 6–6 and 6–8)

a. Loosen the securing bolt (B) of the external alignment light.

b. Adjust the light position by moving the light unit.

c. Fasten the securing bolt (B).

10. Use the plumb bob to verify that the sagittal beam is parallel with the free hanging plumb bob line.

11. Restore the Gantry to original configuration.

Illustration 6–8 Sagittal Alignment Light Adjustment

Securing Bolt (A)

Securing Bolt (B)

6–10 GANTRY
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

6-2 POSITIONING LIGHT (continued)

Move Test
1. Place a marker on the cradle at the point where the beam from the external positioning light intersects the cradle.

2. Move the cradle as follows:

‘Zero’ → ‘Move to Scan’ → ‘In’ (Press the button until the cradle stops.)

3. The marker for the external positioning light should now coincide with the slice position of the internal positioning
light; the difference should be within 1mm.

6–11 GANTRY
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

6-3 POSITIONING LIGHT BREAKER


The positioning light breaker is used to protect the positioning lights from exceeded current. This breaker is located
above the Sub–board assy.

1. Verify that the breaker is in the ON position.

If the breaker is in the OFF position, remove the Gantry cover, and verify that the wire from the breaker to the
positioning light and wire around the connector are correctly located, then switch ON the breaker.

Note
This breaker can not be switched OFF manually, it will only be switched OFF by excess current.

Illustration 6–9 Positioning Light Breaker

White area is
visible

Sub
Board TGP Board

ON OFF

6–12 GANTRY
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

6-4 TABLE AND GANTRY INTERLOCK


1. Tilt the Gantry to 0° position.

2. Raise the Table to the highest position.

3. Move the cradle to any position except the out limit position.

4. Mover the Table down until it stops automatically; this is the interlock position.

5. Verify that the Table Up/Down function and Gantry tilt function are interlocked along the dashed line indicated
in illustration , but that the cradle In/Out function can still operated

6. Move the cradle to the out limit position.

7. Verify that the Table can be lowered to the lowest position.

Illustration 6–10 Table/Gantry Interlock

: Interlock Area
: Up/Down, Tilt Area

–100
Table Height

–150

–200

–250
25 20 10 0 10 20 25
BWD FWD

6–13 GANTRY
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
blank 2234976

6–14 GANTRY
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

TABLE

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION PAGE

SECTION 1 – ELEVATION FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1


1-1 MECHANICAL LIMIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1-2 TABLE HEIGHT (H0/HG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3
1-3 TABLE DOWN SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5
1-3-1 Table Down Speed (for Table 2109042) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5
1-3-2 Table Down Speed (for Table P9155AF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–6
1-4 CRADLE COMPENSATION FOR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–7

SECTION 2 – LONGITUDINAL FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1


2-1 PRELIMINARY CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2-2 CRADLE MECHANICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2-2-1 Unlatch Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2-2-2 Gap between Frame and Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2-2-3 Gap between Cradle and Cradle Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
2-2-4 Gap between Cradle and Table Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5
2-2-5 Gap between Cradle and Sponge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6
2-2-6 Attachment Strap Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–7
2-3 TRAVEL ACCURACY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–8
2-4 CRADLE REPEATABILITY CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9
2-5 CRADLE ABSOLUTE POSITION (P0/PG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10
2-6 CRADLE WIRE CABLE TENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–11

SECTION 3 – TABLE ACCESSORIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1


3-1 HEAD HOLDER STABILITY CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1

i TABLE
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
blank 2234976

ii TABLE
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

SECTION 1 – ELEVATION FUNCTION

1-1 MECHANICAL LIMIT


1. Preparation:

a. Turn OFF the ‘Scan’ and ‘TBL/Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.

b. Remove the left side cover to access the TGP board.

c. Remove the Table bottom cover.

d. Turn ON the ‘Scan’ and ‘TBL/Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.

e. Tilt the Gantry 0 degree. Move the cradle to its outer limit furthest from the Gantry.

2. Verify that the Table raises and lowers smoothly.

3. Set S11 dip switch (location 4N) on the TGP board to ON. (Cancels the Table interlock function)

4. Press and hold the ‘Down’ button on the Gantry panel until the Table stops at its lower mechanical limit position.

Verify that the Table height is within the specifications listed in Table 1–1.

5. Press and hold the ‘Up’ button on the Gantry panel until the Table stops at its temporary stop position.

Verify that the Table height is within the specifications listed in Table 1–1.

6. Release ‘Up’ button and depress it again until the Table stops at its upper mechanical limit position.

Verify that the Table height is within the specifications listed in Table 1–1.

7. Set S11 dip switch (location 4N) on the TGP board to ON. (Enables the Table interlock function)

8. Press and hold the ‘Down’ button on the Gantry panel until the Table stops at the lower interlocked position.

Verify that the Table height is within the specifications.

9. Restore the Gantry and Table to original configuration.

1–1 TABLE
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-1 MECHANICAL LIMIT (continued)

Table 1–1 Table Height

Table 2129566 or 2109042 Table P9155AF


Upper Mechanical Limit Position more than 898 mm more than 953 mm
Temporary Stop Position approximately 736 mm approximately 791 mm
Lower Mechanical Limit Position more than 277 mm more than 332 mm

Illustration 1–1 Table Height Measure

Cradle Cradle

For Table For Table


2109042 Measued 2129566 or P9155AF Measued
Hieght Hieght

64 mm 9 mm

Base Support
Table Frame
Table Frame

1–2 TABLE
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-2 TABLE HEIGHT (H0/HG)


1. Preparation:

a. Turn OFF the ‘Scan’ and ‘TBL/Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.

b. Remove the left side cover to access the TGP board.

c. Remove the Table bottom cover.

d. Turn ON the ‘Scan’ and ‘TBL/Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.

e. Tilt the Gantry 0 degree. Move the cradle to its outer limit furthest from the Gantry.

2. Enter the TGP off–line function #001 (Table height display mode):

a. Set the S14 Table dip switch (location 4N) to ON on the TGP board.

b. Push the ‘TEST B’ button once. The Gantry display will change from 000 to 001.

3. Adjust the low height position:

a. Lower the Table to a height of the following position.

Table 2129566 or 2109042 Table P9155AF


286 mm 341 mm

If the Table can not be lowered down to low height position due to the interlock function, switch ON (up) the S11
dip switch to disable the interlock function, and continue to lower the Table.

b. Adjust variable register H0 on the TGP board so that the Gantry display XXXX equals 0010.

4. Adjust the high height position:

a. Raise the Table to a height of the following position.

Table 2129566 or 2109042 Table P9155AF


886 mm 941 mm

If the Table can not be raised up to high height position due to the interlock function, switch ON (up) the S11 dip
switch to disable the interlock function, and continue to raise the Table.

b. Adjust variable register HG on the TGP board so that the Gantry display XXXX equals 0120.

5. Set the S14 and S11 dip switches to OFF on the TGP board.

1–3 TABLE
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-2 TABLE HEIGHT (continued)


6. Press the ‘Up’ button on the Gantry panel, and verify that the Gantry Display shows ‘0’.

7. Set the Table height to ‘–100mm’ according to the Gantry Display.

8. Measure the Table height. (YYYY) mm, and verify the following:

886 – YYYY = 100mm ± 1mm (for Table 2129566 of 2190942)


941 – YYYY = 100mm ± 1mm (for Table P9155AF)

If not, repeat the steps 2. through 5.

9. Push the Reset switch of the TGP board.

10. Restore the Gantry and Table to original configuration.

1–4 TABLE
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-3 TABLE DOWN SPEED

1-3-1 Table Down Speed (for Table 2109042)


1. Preparation:

a. Turn OFF the ‘TBL/Tilt’ switch at the Gantry rear base.

b. Remove the left and right side Table covers.

2. Adjust flow adjuster as follows:

a. Loosen the set nut for the flow adjuster.

b. Close the flow adjuster by rotating it in the CW direction limit.

c. Rotate the flow adjuster two full rotations in the CCW direction.

d. Tighten the set nut for the flow adjuster.

3. Restore the Table to original configuration.

Illustration 1–2 Flow Adjuster (for Table 2109042)

Flow Adjuster

Pressure Relief Valve


Set Nut

Electromagnetic Valve

1–5 TABLE
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-3 TABLE DOWN SPEED (continued)

1-3-2 Table Down Speed (for Table P9155AF)


1. Preparation:

a. Turn OFF the ‘TBL/Tilt’ switch at the Gantry rear base.

b. Remove the left and right side Table covers.

c. Remove the cradle and cradle tray.

d. Turn ON the ‘TBL/Tilt’ switch at the Gantry rear base.

2. Evenly distribute a 75kg load along the cradle.

3. Adjust the electromagnetic valve until the Table travels from the highest to the lowest position within 30 sec ±
1 sec.

4. Restore the Table to original configuration.

Illustration 1–3 Flow Adjuster (for Table P9155AF)

Cylinder Flow Adjuster

Set Nut

Electromagnetic Valve

Pressure Relief Valve

1–6 TABLE
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-4 CRADLE COMPENSATION FOR UP/DOWN MOVEMENT


1. Turn ON the ‘Scan’, ‘TBL/Tilt’ and ‘Control’ switches at the Gantry rear base sequentially.

2. Set the Table height to approximately ‘–100 mm’ according to the Gantry Display.

3. Move the cradle IN 500mm from the out limit.

4. Push the positioning light switch, and mark the position on the cradle where is hit by positioning light beam.

5. Verify that the difference in position between the cradle marking and the string position is as follows:

a. Lower the Table to 50mm height (shown on Gantry Display).

b. Push the positioning light switch.

Check if the distance from mark and the positioning light beam is less than 1mm.

c. Raise the Table to 100mm height (shown on Gantry Display).

d. Push the positioning light switch.

Check if the distance from mark and the positioning light beam is less than 1mm.

e. Perform the same check for other height positions within 0 ∼ –230mm.

f. Mark the cradle and raise or lower the Table approximately 150mm within 0 ∼ –220mm.

Check if the distance from mark and the positioning light beam is less than 2mm.

6. If the cradle compensation is out of specification, perform P0/PG and H0/HG adjustment.

1–7 TABLE
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
blank 2234976

1–8 TABLE
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

SECTION 2 – LONGITUDINAL FUNCTION

2-1 PRELIMINARY CHECK


1. Load cradle with approximately 180kg of weight.

2. Raise the Table to approximately 600mm from the base.

3. Verify that the cradle moves IN and OUT smoothly by pressing the ‘IN’ or ‘OUT’ button on the Gantry panel.

4. Verify that the cradle moves IN and OUT smoothly at approximately twice the speed as in step 3. by pressing
the ‘IN’ or‘ OUT’ button together with the ‘FAST’ button.

5. Measure the distance between the maximum advanced (IN) position and maximum retracted position of the
cradle.

Verify that the distance is more than 1510mm.

2–1 TABLE
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-2 CRADLE MECHANICS

2-2-1 Unlatch Switches


To perform the following procedure, a person should ride on the cradle, or some substitute should be placed on the
cradle.

1. Move the cradle to Out limit position by the ‘OUT’ button.

2. While moving the cradle in the IN direction by continuously pushing ‘IN’ button, perform the following:

a. Push the Unlatch switch (‘Free’).

Verify that the cradle stops moving, and that the Gantry Display goes blank; this indicating that the cradle is
unlatched.

b. Push the Unlatch switch again (‘Latch’).

c. Release the ‘IN’ button, and then push it.

Verify that the cradle starts moving and the Gantry Display changes to normal (displaying a position in millime-
ter).

3. Repeat the above same check for the Unlatch switch on the opposite side.

Illustration 2–1 Unlatch Switch Location

Unlatch Switch

2–2 TABLE
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-2-2 Gap between Frame and Cradle


1. Turn OFF the ‘Scan’ and ‘TBL/Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.

2. Remove the Table right and left side covers.

3. Move the cradle to the Out limit position by hand.

4. Adjust the position of the bearings to meet the following conditions.

D The Table frame and the cradle are parallel; adjust so that the difference between gap DF (measured on
the IN side) and gap DR (measured on the Out side) becomes 1.5mm or less.

D A gap of .01mm or more (‘A’) exists between the cradle and the bearing (at least one of the right and left
bearings); however, the total of the gaps on the right and left sides should be 2.5mm or less.

5. Restore the Table to original configuration.

Illustration 2–2 Gap Between Frame and Cradle

Frame

DF DR

Gantry Cradle

Front View ‘A’ Side View

Cradle
Frame

Bearing
Bearing
Fix Screws

2–3 TABLE
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-2-3 Gap between Cradle and Cradle Support


1. Turn OFF the ‘Scan’ and ‘TBL/Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.

2. Remove the Table right and left side covers.

3. Observe the gap between the cradle and the cradle support bearing (see illustration 2–3) while moving the cradle
with no load over the entire travel (In ↔ Out) by hand, and find out a travel point where the gap is the narrowest
and stop the cradle there.

4. Adjust the gap between the cradle and the cradle support bearing by the nuts, so that the gap becomes 0.2mm
or less (however, it should be >0).

5. Verify that the cradle does not touch the cradle support bearing while moving the cradle with no load over the
entire travel (In ↔ Out).

6. Restore the Table to original configuration.

Illustration 2–3 Gap between Cradle and Cradle Support

Cradle

0.2mm or less

Cradle Support
Roller

Nuts

2–4 TABLE
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-2-4 Gap between Cradle and Table Cover


1. Install the Table right and left side covers.

2. Verify that the ‘TBL/Tilt’ switch at the Gantry rear base is OFF.

3. Move the cradle to the Out limit position by hand.

4. Adjust the gap between the cradle and the Table covers by loosening the cover attaching bolts, so that the gap
becomes 7mm or less (however, it should be > 0).

Illustration 2–4 Gap between Table Cover and Cradle

7mm or less 7mm or less


(however, it should be >0) (however, it should be >0)

Cradle

Table Cover Table Cover

2–5 TABLE
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-2-5 Gap between Cradle and Sponge


1. Move the cradle slightly to the IN position.

2. The cradle has the side play. Move the cradle to the left all the way by hand, and then check the gap between
the cradle and the sponge. It must be within the specifications below:

D Gap between cradle and sponge : 1mm or less

D Gap between cradle base and sponge : Approximately 5.5mm

3. Move the cradle to the right all the way by hand, and then check the gap between the cradle and the sponge.
It must be within the specification in step 2 above (see illustration 2–5).

4. Move the cradle IN or OUT, and then verify that both sponges should not be pulled by the cradle.

Illustration 2–5 Gap between Cradle and Sponge

1mm or less Sponge


Cradle Table Cover

Approximately
5.5mm

Cradle Base

2–6 TABLE
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-2-6 Attachment Strap Installation


1. Check if the attachment strap is properly installed (see illustration ).

D The attachment strap must be attached to the cradle Velcro tape securely to prevent it from peeling off.

D The end of the attachment strap does not protrude through the end of the cradle Velcro tape. If it does,
the trouble of sponge removal or cradle slip might occur.

Illustration 2–6 Attachment Strap Installation

Attachment Strap
Cradle Velcro Tape

The attachment strap must be attached to the cradle


Velcro tape securely so that its end does not protrude
through the end of the cradle Velcro tape.

2–7 TABLE
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-3 TRAVEL ACCURACY


1. Set the Gantry to 0° tilt position.

2. Raise the Table to the maximum height.

3. Move the cradle to its Out limit position.

Move the cradle approximately 200 in the IN direction.

4. Press the ‘Zero’ button, and verify that the Gantry Display indicates Zero.

5. Mark the Table cover with a marking tape or other at one end of the cradle. Define this position as a reference.

6. Move the cradle approximately 1000mm (Display) by pushing the ‘IN’ + ‘Fast’ buttons.

7. Read the absolute value on the Display (A).

Measure the cradle movement (B).

Verify the following:

|A–B|
x 100 ≤ 0.5(%)
B

8. Perform the same check by returning the cradle in the Out direction approximately 1000mm.

2–8 TABLE
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-4 CRADLE REPEATABILITY CHECK


1. Set the Gantry to 0° tilt position.

2. Raise the Table to the maximum height.

3. Move the cradle to its Out limit position.

4. Press the ‘Zero’ button, and verify that the Gantry Display indicates Zero.

5. Mark the Table cover with a marking tape or other at one end of the cradle. Define this position as a reference.

6. Move the cradle approximately 100mm (Display) by pressing the ‘In’ button.

Repeat the above step a total ten times, i.e., 1000mm movement.

7. Return the cradle continuously without stopping until the Gantry Display shows ± 1.0 (mm).

8. Verify that the cradle has returned to the reference point (per step 5.).

9. Move the cradle to the IN limit position. Do the same check as above in the reverse direction.

Illustration 2–7 Cradle Movement

Reference
Point

2–9 TABLE
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-5 CRADLE ABSOLUTE POSITION (P0/PG)


1. Preparation:

a. Remove the left side cover to access the TGP board.

b. Set the TGP service switch SYS/OFF/MNL to OFF.

c. Set the Gable height to more than –150mm (on Gantry Display).

Adjustment at Out limit position


2. Set the cradle to the Out mechanical limit position.

Push the ‘Zero’ button.

Move the cradle in the IN direction until the Gantry display reads 5.0 (mm).
(If you can’t move the cradle with the switches, release the cradle and move it into position by hand.)

Push the ‘Zero’ button.

3. Enter the TGP off–line function #000 (cradle position display mode):

a. Set the S14 Table dip switch (location: 4N) to ON on the TGP board.
(The Gantry Display shows the A/D converted value of the cradle position potentiometer.)

4. Adjust variable register P0 on the TGP board so that the Gantry Display value equals 0010.

5. Exit the TGP off–line function #000 by setting the S14 Table dip switch to OFF on the TGP board.

The Gantry Display will return to its normal status.

Adjustment at In limit position


6. Move the cradle in the IN direction until the Gantry Display reads 1520.0 (mm)
(If you can’t move the cradle with the switches, release the cradle and move it into position by hand.)

7. Enter the TGP off–line function #000 by repeating step 3.

8. Adjust variable register PG on the TGP board so that the Gantry Display value equals 3050.

9. Exit the TGP off–line function #000 by setting the S14 Table dip switch to OFF on the TGP board.

The Gantry Display will return to its normal status.

10. Restore the Gantry to original configuration.

2–10 TABLE
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-6 CRADLE WIRE CABLE TENSION


1. Perform this adjustment after replacing the wire cable. Adjust M6 nuts (Gantry side) until the distance between
the case spring and block spring becomes approximately 1mm.

Illustration 2–8 Wire Cable Tension Adjustment

Approximately 1mm Gantry


Case Spring

M6 Nuts
Block Spring

2–11 TABLE
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
blank 2234976

2–12 TABLE
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

SECTION 3 – TABLE ACCESSORIES

3-1 HEAD HOLDER STABILITY CHECK


1. Verify that the removal and installation of the cradle extender and every kinds of head holder can be performed
smoothly.

If not, adjust the gap between cradle end palate and head holder.

Illustration 3–1 Set Screw Adjustment

Cradle End Plate


Head
Holder

Set Screw
Just Touch

3–1 TABLE
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
blank 2234976

3–2 TABLE
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

DAS / DETECTOR

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION PAGE

SECTION 1 – DAS COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1


1-1 DAS POWER SUPPLIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1-2 ADC BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3
1-2-1 Comparator Reference Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3
1-2-2 Input Amp. (for Comparators) Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5
1-2-3 Input Amp. (for A/D Converter) Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–7
1-2-4 Input Amp. Gain Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–9
1-2-5 ADC Circuits Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–12

SECTION 2 – DETECTOR RELATED DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1


2-1 BIAS VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2-2 HEATER AND TEMP–CONT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2-2-1 Operation Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2-2-2 Temp–Cont Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3

SECTION 3 – DAS OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1


3-1 DAS DATA TRANSFER CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3-2 DAS OFFSET DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6
3-3 LINEARITY CHECK (NO X–RAY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9

i DAS/DETECTOR
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
blank 2234976

ii DAS/DETECTOR
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

SECTION 1 – DAS COMPONENTS

1-1 DAS POWER SUPPLIES


1. Preparation:

a. Turn OFF the ‘Scan’ and ‘DAS/Det’ switches at the Gantry rear base.

b. Remove the Gantry front and both side covers.

c. Set the service switch on the Sub–board to ON.

d. Rotate the Gantry until the DAS assy reaches the 2 o’clock position.

e. Set the service switch on the Sub–board to OFF.

2. Remove the DAS box cover and the power supply cover. The DAS has three DC power supplies.

Illustration 1–1 DAS Assy

+5V DC P/S +15V DC P/S –15V DC P/S

DAS Box Cover

LED LED LED


VR1 VR1 VR1

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

+5V GND +15V GND –15V GND

VR1

DAS DC Power CCW CW


Supply Cover (Decrease) (Increase)

1–1 DAS/DETECTOR
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-1 DAS POWER SUPPLIES (continued)


3. Turn ON the ‘DAS/Det’ switch at the Gantry rear base.

4. Check DC voltages and ripples on the ADC board, according to Table 1–1.

Check the output of the +5VDC power supply on the CIF board, according to Table 1–2.

Verify that the power supply voltages are within specifications.


If not, adjust the voltage with the appropriate variable register (VR1), then perform the Calibration.

5. Install the DAS box cover and the power supply cover.

6. Restore the Gantry to original configuration.

Table 1–1 DC Power Supply Specifications

ADC Board 2106694


DC Voltage Test Point Specification
TP22
Voltage Ripple TP24
TP23
+15VDC TP22 (GND TP23) +14.95 VDC ∼ +15.05 VDC <150 mV
TP30
–15VDC TP24 (GND TP23) –14.95 VDC ∼ –15.05 VDC <150 mV

+5VDC TP31 (GND TP30) +4.95 VDC ∼ +5.05 VDC <120 mV

ADC Board P9154XA


DC Voltage Test Point Specification
TP19
Voltage Ripple
TP21
+15VDC TP21 (GND TP20) +14.95 VDC ∼ +15.05 VDC <150 mV TP20

–15VDC TP19 (GND TP20) –14.95 VDC ∼ –15.05 VDC <150 mV TP27

+5VDC TP28 (GND TP27) +4.95 VDC ∼ +5.05 VDC <120 mV

Table 1–2 +5VDC Power Supply Specification

CIF Board
DC Voltage Test Point Specification
Voltage Ripple
+5 VDC TP14 (GND TP13) +4.75 VDC ∼ +5.25 VDC <120 mV

1–2 DAS/DETECTOR
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-2 ADC BOARD

1-2-1 Comparator Reference Voltage


1. Preparation:

a. Turn OFF the ‘Scan’ and ‘TBL/Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.

b. Remove the Gantry front and both side covers.

c. Set the service switch on the Sub–board to ON.

d. Rotate the Gantry until the DAS assy reaches the 2 o’clock position.

e. Set the service switch on the Sub–board to OFF.

2. Remove the DAS box cover.

3. Set the jumpers and switch of the ADC board as follows:

ADC Board 2106694 ADC Board P9154XA


SW4 ‘0’ position SW1 and SW2 ‘OFST’ position
J1 Installed SW4 ‘TEST’ position
J3 ‘FIX’ position J1 and J2 Installed
J5 and J6 ‘OFST’ position J3 ‘CAL1’ position
J4 ‘0’ position

J1 J2 SW3
J1 J5 J6
J3
SW1 SW2 J3 J4

SW4

SW4

1–3 DAS/DETECTOR
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-2-1 Comparator Reference Voltage (continued)


4. Measure the DC voltage on the ADC board, according to Table below.

Verify that the output voltages are within specifications. If not, adjust the output voltages.

Table 1–3 Output Voltage Specifications

ADC Board 2106694 ADC Board P9154XA


Measurement Point Specification Measurement Point Specification Pot.
TP7 (GND TP13) +2.475V ∼ +2.525V U12–2pin (GND TP11) +2.475V ∼ +2.525V –
TP8 (GND TP13) +564mV ∼ +649mV TP6 (GND TP11) +37mV ± 0.05mV RV3
TP9 (GND TP13) +55mV ∼ +64mV TP7 (GND TP11) +157mV ± 0.2mV RV4
TP10 (GND TP13) +151mV ∼ +161mV TP8 (GND TP11) +610mV ± 1mV RV5
TP11 (GND TP13) +2.205V ∼ +2.295V TP9 (GND TP11) +2.25V ± 5mV RV6
TP14 (GND TP13) +2.475V ∼ +2.525V TP10 (GND TP11) +72mV ± 0.05mV RV7

TP7

TP6 TP8 TP10


TP8 TP10 TP13(GND)

TP6 TP6 U12


TP8 TP11 RV3 RV5 RV7

TP14
RV4 RV6 TP11(GND)

D Output voltage of the ADC board 2106694 is not adjustable.

5. Return the jumpers and switches to the normal position.

6. Install the DAS box cover.

7. Restore the Gantry to original configuration.

1–4 DAS/DETECTOR
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-2-2 Input Amp. (for Comparators) Offset


1. Preparation:

a. Turn OFF the ‘Scan’ and ‘TBL/Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.

b. Remove the Gantry front and both side covers.

c. Set the service switch on the Sub–board to ON.

d. Rotate the Gantry until the DAS assy reaches the 2 o’clock position.

e. Set the service switch on the Sub–board to OFF.

2. Remove the DAS box cover.

3. Set the jumpers and switch of the ADC board as follows:

ADC Board 2106694 ADC Board P9154XA


SW4 ‘0’ position SW1 ‘OFST’ position
J1 Installed J1 Installed
J3 ‘FIX’ position
J5 and J6 ‘OFST’ position

4. Measure the DC voltage on the ADC board, according to Table below.

Verify that the output voltages are within specifications. If not, adjust the output voltage.

Table 1–4 Output Voltage Specifications

ADC Board 2106694 ADC Board P9154XA


Measurement Point Specification Measurement Point Specification Pot.
TP4 (GND TP1) –1mV ∼ +1mV TP4 (GND TP1) ± 0.1mV or less RV1

TP1(GND) TP1(GND)
RV2

TP4

TP4 TP5
RV1

D Output voltage of the ADC board 2106694 is not adjustable.

1–5 DAS/DETECTOR
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-2-2 Input Amp. (for Comparators) Offset (continued)


5. For ADC Board P9154XA:

a. Set the jumpers and switch of the ADC board (P9154XA) as follows:

ADC Board P9154XA


SW2 ‘OFST’ position
J2 Installed

b. Measure the DC voltage on the ADC board, according to Table below.

Verify that the output voltage is within specifications. If not, adjust the output voltage.

Table 1–5 Output Voltage Specification

ADC Board P9154XA


Measurement Point Specification Potentiometer
TP5 (GND TP1) ± 0.1mV or less RV2

6. Return the jumpers and switches to the normal position.

7. Install the DAS box cover.

8. Restore the Gantry to original configuration.

1–6 DAS/DETECTOR
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-2-3 Input Amp. (for A/D Converter) Offset


Note
This check can only be used for ADC Board (2106694).

1. Preparation:

a. Turn OFF the ‘Scan’ and ‘TBL/Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.

b. Remove the Gantry front and both side covers.

c. Set the service switch on the Sub–board to ON.

d. Rotate the Gantry until the DAS assy reaches the 2 o’clock position.

e. Set the service switch on the Sub–board to OFF.

2. Remove the DAS box cover.

3. Set the jumpers and switch of the ADC board and CIF board as follows:

ADC Board (2106694) CIF Board (2108372)


SW4 ‘0’ position J4 ‘OFF’ position
J1 Installed
J3 ‘FIX’ position
J5 and J6 ‘OFST’ position

J1 J5 J6
J3
SW1

SW4 J4
J3
J2
J1

1–7 DAS/DETECTOR
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-2-3 Input Amp. (for A/D Converter) Offset (continued)


4. Measure the DC voltage on the ADC board, according to Table below.

Verify that the output voltage is within specifications.

Table 1–6 Output Voltage Specification

ADC Board (2106694)


Measurement Point Specification
TP21 (GND TP20) –10mV ∼ +0.1mV

TP21
TP20(GND)

D Output voltage of the ADC board 2106694 is not adjustable.

5. Return the jumpers and switches to the normal position.

6. Install the DAS box cover.

7. Restore the Gantry to original configuration.

1–8 DAS/DETECTOR
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-2-4 Input Amp. Gain Check


1. Preparation:

a. Turn OFF the ‘Scan’ and ‘TBL/Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.

b. Remove the Gantry front and both side covers.

c. Set the service switch on the Sub–board to ON.

d. Rotate the Gantry until the DAS assy reaches the 2 o’clock position.

e. Set the service switch on the Sub–board to OFF.

2. Remove the DAS box cover.

3. Check and adjust the DC voltage:

a. Set the jumper and switch of the ADC board and CIF board, according to Table 1–7.

b. Measure the voltage, and adjust it, according to Table 1–7.

Table 1–7 Jumper/Switch Settings and Output Voltage Specification

For ADC Board 2106694 For ADC Board P9154XA


Jumper/Switch ADC Board ADC Board
Settings SW4 :1 J3 :CAL1
CIF Board
J4 :OFF
Measurement Point TP17 (GND TP19) TP13 (GND TP1)
Specification +1.00V +1.000V
Potentiometer RV3 RV8

1–9 DAS/DETECTOR
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-2-4 Input Amp. Gain Check (continued)


4. Check the DC voltage (U1 Amplifier Gain):

a. Set the jumper and switch of the ADC board, according to Table 1–8.

b. Attach a jumper lead, according to Table 1–8.

c. Measure the voltage and check that it is within the following specification (see Table 1–8).

Table 1–8 Jumper/Switch Settings and U1 Amplifier Gain Specification

For ADC Board 2106694 For ADC Board P9154XA


Jumper/Switch ADC Board ADC Board
Settings J1 :Removed SW3 :TEST
J5 :OFST J1 :Removed
J6 :OFST J2 :Removed
J4 :Removed
Configuration Attach a jumper lead (TP2 – TP17) Attach a jumper lead (TP2 – TP13)
Measurement Point TP4 (GND TP1) TP4 (GND TP1)
Specification –4.73V ∼ +4.87V –4.75V ∼ +4.80V

5. Remove the jumper lead from the ADC board.

6. Check the DC voltage (Instrumentation Amplifier Gain):

a. Set the jumper and switch of the ADC board, according to Table 1–9

b. Attach a jumper lead, according to Table 1–9

c. Measure the voltage and check that it is within the following specification (see Table 1–9).

Table 1–9 Jumper/Switch Settings and Instrumentation Amplifier Gain Specification

For ADC Board 2106694 For ADC Board P9154XA


Jumper/Switch ADC Board
Settings J5 :Removed
Configuration Attach a jumper lead (TP18 – TP17) Attach a jumper lead (TP15 – TP13)
Measurement Point TP21 (GND TP20) TP17 (GND TP16)
Specification –4.74V ∼ +4.88V –4.70V ∼ +4.85V

1–10 DAS/DETECTOR
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-2-4 Input Amp. Gain Check (continued)


7. For ADC Board P9154XA:

a. Check the DC voltage (U2 Amplifier Gain):

i. Measure the output voltage of the TP13 (GND TP1), and turn the RV8 until the voltage is +0.100V.

ii. Remove the jumper lead, and attach it to TP3 and to TP13.

iii. Measure the output voltage of the TP5 (GND TP1), and check that it is within +2.09V ∼ +2.11V.

8. Remove the jumper lead from the ADC board.

9. Set the ADC Board to the following configuration:

For ADC Board 2106694 For ADC Board P9154XA


Jumper/Switch Normal Position Normal Position
Settings
Potentiometer Turn RV3 to its CCW limit position. Turn RV8 to its CCW limit position.

10. Install the DAS box cover.

11. Restore the Gantry to original configuration.

1–11 DAS/DETECTOR
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-2-5 ADC Circuits Offset


Note
This check can only be used for ADC Board (P9154XA).

1. Preparation:

a. Turn OFF the ‘Scan’ and ‘TBL/Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.

b. Remove the Gantry front and both side covers.

c. Set the service switch on the Sub–board to ON.

d. Rotate the Gantry until the DAS assy reaches the 2 o’clock position.

e. Set the service switch on the Sub–board to OFF.

2. Remove the DAS box cover.

3. Set the jumper and switches of the ADC board, according to the following:

J4 :‘0’ position
SW4 :‘0’ position
SW3 :‘TEST’ position

4. Verify that the DM1 LED’s for bit1 and bit2 are dimly lit.
If not, perform the following:

a. Turn RV9 potentiometer to the CCW limit.

b. Turn the RV9 slowly in the CW direction until only the DM1 LED’s for bit1 and bit2 are dimly lit.

c. Set the SW3 to normal position.

d. Install the DAS box cover, and leave it for approximately one hour to check the temperature drift effect on the
ADC circuits offset.

e. Remove the DAS box cover, and check the DM1 LED’s condition again (repeat steps 3. to 4.).

5. Set the SW3 to normal position.

6. Install the DAS box cover, and restore the Gantry to original configuration.

Illustration 1–2 DM1 LED’s Condition

1 ON
2 Dimly Lit
3 OFF
4

1–12 DAS/DETECTOR
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

SECTION 2 – DETECTOR RELATED DEVICES

2-1 BIAS VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY

CAUTION
The Detector Bias voltage is approximately 1000VDC !
Do not touch conducting parts of the voltage, so you do not receive a shock.
1. Wait approximately five minute after switching OFF the ‘DAS/Det’ switch for the bias
voltage to bleed off to a safe level.
2. Use a proper range on the digital volt meter.

1. Preparation:
a. Turn OFF the ‘Scan’, ‘TBL/Tilt’ and ‘DAS/Det’ switches at the Gantry rear base.
b. Remove the Gantry front and both side covers.
c. Set the service switch on the Sub–board to ON.
d. Rotate the Gantry until the DAS assy reaches the 12 o’clock position.
e. Set the service switch on the Sub–board to OFF.
2. Connect the (–) lead of a digital volt meter to Ground.
Connect the (+) lead to the 10MΩ resistor on the Detector backplane.
Note
It is not easy to access the measuring point for the (+) side, take care not to short the (+) point to
Ground.
3. Verify that the voltage is +1000 ± 10VDC.
4. Restore the Gantry to original configuration.

Illustration 2–1 Measurement Point

Bias Voltage
Power Supply

Detector
Backplane

10MΩ Resister DVM (+) Lead


DVM (–) Lead

BNC Connector

2–1 DAS/DETECTOR
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-2 HEATER AND TEMP–CONT

2-2-1 Operation Check


Note
Ensure that the DAS/Det power has been ON for at least two hours.

1. Preparation:

a. Turn OFF the ‘Scan’ and ‘TBL/Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.

b. Remove the Gantry front and both side covers.

c. Set the service switch on the Sub–board to ON.

d. Rotate the Gantry until the x–ray tube reaches the 12 o’clock position.

e. Set the service switch on the Sub–board to OFF.

2. Remove the TEMP CONT box cover.

3. Set a clamp–on meter at near the TEMP CONT box to measure the AC current supplied to the transformer of
the TEMP CONT box.

4. Monitor the ‘D3’ LED on the TEMP CONT board.

Verify that the current increases by approximately 1A when the ‘D3’ LED lights ON.
(This indicates that the Detector heater is turned ON.)

Verify that the ‘D3’ LED cycles ON and OFF.

5. Install the TEMP CONT box cover.

6. Restore the Gantry to original configuration.

Illustration 2–2 Temperature Control Box

CN3

TEMP CONT Box

2–2 DAS/DETECTOR
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-2-2 Temp–Cont Adjustment


This adjustment is required when either a Detector or a TEMP CONT box is replaced.

1. Preparation:

a. Turn OFF the ‘Scan’, ‘TBL/Tilt’ and ‘DAS/Det’ switches at the Gantry rear base.

b. Remove the Gantry front and both side covers.

c. Set the service switch on the Sub–board to ON.

d. Rotate the Gantry until the x–ray tube reaches the 12 o’clock position.

e. Set the service switch on the Sub–board to OFF.

2. Remove the TEMP CONT box cover.

3. Set the TEMP CONT to the following configuration:

For Temp–Cont Board 2180272 For Temp–Cont Board P9144WM


J1 :Removed J2 :Removed
CN3 :Disconnect CN3 :Disconnect

4. Read the thermistor resistance value on a tag.

5. Connect a digital meter between TP1 and TP2 (resistance measurement mode).

6. Adjust RV1 until the resistance between TP1 and TP2 matches the thermistor resistance value on a tag.

7. Set the TEMP CONT to original configuration.

8. Install the TEMP CONT box cover.

9. Restore the Gantry to original configuration.

Illustration 2–3 TEMP CONT Board

J1:for 2108272
TP1 TP2 J2:for P9144WN

LED

RV1

CN1 CN2 CN3

TAG

2–3 DAS/DETECTOR
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
blank 2234976

2–4 DAS/DETECTOR
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

SECTION 3 – DAS OPERATION

3-1 DAS DATA TRANSFER CHECK

Prerequisites for On–Line Check


D X–ray sub–system has been properly calibrated.

D Table/Gantry sub–system has been properly adjusted.

Procedure
1. Preparation:

a. Turn OFF the ‘Scan’ and ‘TBL/Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.

b. Remove the Gantry front and both side covers.

2. Set the SW1 on the CIF board to ‘TEST’ position as follows:

a. Turn OFF the ‘DAS/Det’ switch at the Gantry rear base.

b. Set the service switch on the Sub–board to ON.

c. Rotate the Gantry until the DAS assy reaches the 2 o’clock position.

d. Set the service switch on the Sub–board to OFF.

e. Remove the DAS box cover.

f. Set the SW1 on the CIF board to ‘TEST’ position

g. Install the DAS box cover.

h. Turn ON the ‘DAS/Det’ switch at the Gantry rear base.

3. Turn ON the ‘Scan’ and ‘TBL/Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.

3–1 DAS/DETECTOR
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

3-1 DAS DATA TRANSFER CHECK (continued)


4. Perform the Off–Line scan for CW and CCW:

a. Insert the BOOT floppy into the disk drive.

b. Touch the [Maint] key and enter $$ to display the Maintenance menu.

c. Select SUPPORT from the Maintenance menu.

d. Select OFF LINE SCAN from the Support menu.

e. In this menu, perform the following axial scan:

Scan 1 Scan 2
Scan Time :3.6 sec (CT Sytec 2000i, S) Scan Time :3.6 sec (CT Sytec 2000i, S)
4.5 sec (CT Sytec 3000i, 4000i, Plus) 4.5 sec (CT Sytec 3000i, 4000i, Plus)
CW/CCW :CW CW/CCW :CCW
Thickness :10 mm Thickness :10 mm
XG Rotor :Both OFF XG Rotor :Both OFF
(Others) :(defaults) (Others) :(defaults)

5. Check the acquired raw data as follows:

a. Check Fan Data as follows:

i. Select Statistics from the Support menu.

ii. Enter 1 (or 2) for the raw data file ID No.

iii. Select Fan from the Raw Data Format menu.

iv. Select as follows:

OFFSET FILE CORRECTION :(Yes)


REFERENCE CH. CORRECTION :(No)
NATURAL LOG. CONVERSION :(No)

v. Verify that the results are all ‘0’.

MAX MAX
MIN
AVE

MIN MAX
MIN
AVE
All Zero
MEAN MAX
MIN
AVE

S.D. MAX
MIN
AVE

3–2 DAS/DETECTOR
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

3-1 DAS DATA TRANSFER CHECK (continued)


b. Check DAS Data as follows:

i. Select Statistics from the Support menu.

ii. Enter 1 (or 2) for the raw data file ID No.

iii. Select DAS Data from the Raw Data Format menu.

iv. Select Channel.

v. Enter 1 as the View No.


Enter 1 as the Channel No.

vi. Verify that the Data pattern is correct (see illustration 3–1).

6. Set the SW1 on the CIF board to normal position

7. Restore the Gantry to original configuration.

3–3 DAS/DETECTOR
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

3-1 DAS DATA TRANSFER CHECK (continued)

Illustration 3–1 DAS Data Pattern


CHANNEL VIEW NO.=0001
0001 1111 2112 3113 4114 5115 6116 7117 8118
0009 9229 A22A B22B C22C D22D E22E F22F 0220
0017 1331 2332 3333 4334 5335 6336 7337 8338
0025 9449 A44A B44B C44C D44D E44E F44F
0032 1551 2552 3553 4554 5555 6556 7557 8558
0040 9669 A66A B66B C66C D66D E66E F66F 0660
0048 1771 2772 3773 4774 5775 6776 7777 8778
0056 9889 A88A B88B C88C D88D E88E F88F
0063 1991 2992 3993 4994 5995 6996 7997 8998
0071 9AA9 AAAA BAAB CAAC DAAD EAAE FAAF 0AA0
0079 1BB1 2BB2 3BB3 4BB4 5BB5 6BB6 7BB7 8BB8
0087 9CC9 ACCA BCCB CCCC DCCD ECCE FCCF
0094 1DD1 2DD2 3DD3 4DD4 5DD5 6DD6 7DD7 8DD8
0102 9EE9 AEEA BEEB CEEC DEED EEEE FEEF 0EE0
0110 1FF1 2FF2 3FF3 4FF4 5FF5 6FF6 7FF7 8FF8
0118 9009 A00A B00B C00C D00D E00E F00F
0125 1111 2112 3113 4114 5115 6116 7117 8118
0133 9229 A22A B22B C22C D22D E22E F22F 0220
0141 1331 2332 3333 4334 5335 6336 7337 8338
0149 9449 A44A B44B C44C D44D E44E F44F
0156 1551 2552 3553 4554 5555 6556 7557 8558
0164 9669 A66A B66B C66C D66D E66E F66F 0660
0172 1771 2772 3773 4774 5775 6776 7777 8778
0180 9889 A88A B88B C88C D88D E88E F88F
0187 1991 2992 3993 4994 5995 6996 7997 8998
0195 9AA9 AAAA BAAB CAAC DAAD EAAE FAAF 0AA0
0203 1BB1 2BB2 3BB3 4BB4 5BB5 6BB6 7BB7 8BB8
0211 9CC9 ACCA BCCB CCCC DCCD ECCE FCCF
0218 1DD1 2DD2 3DD3 4DD4 5DD5 6DD6 7DD7 8DD8
0226 9EE9 AEEA BEEB CEEC DEED EEEE FEEF 0EE0
0234 1FF1 2FF2 3FF3 4FF4 5FF5 6FF6 7FF7 8FF8
0242 9009 A00A B00B C00C D00D E00E F00F
0249 1111 2112 3113 4114 5115 6116 7117 8118
0257 9229 A22A B22B C22C D22D E22E F22F 0220
0265 1331 2332 3333 4334 5335 6336 7337 8338
0273 9449 A44A B44B C44C D44D E44E F44F
0280 1551 2552 3553 4554 5555 6556 7557 8558
0288 9669 A66A B66B C66C D66D E66E F66F 0660
0296 1771 2772 3773 4774 5775 6776 7777 8778
0304 9889 A88A B88B C88C D88D E88E F88F
0311 1991 2992 3993 4994 5995 6996 7997 8998
0319 9AA9 AAAA BAAB CAAC DAAD EAAE FAAF 0AA0
0327 1BB1 2BB2 3BB3 4BB4 5BB5 6BB6 7BB7 8BB8
0335 9CC9 ACCA BCCB CCCC DCCD ECCE FCCF
0342 1DD1 2DD2 3DD3 4DD4 5DD5 6DD6 7DD7 8DD8
0350 9EE9 AEEA BEEB CEEC DEED EEEE FEEF 0EE0
0358 1FF1 2FF2 3FF3 4FF4 5FF5 6FF6 7FF7 8FF8
0366 9009 A00A B00B C00C D00D E00E F00F
0373 1111 2112 3113 4114 5115 6116 7117 8118
0381 9229 A22A B22B C22C D22D E22E F22F 0220
0389 1331 2332 3333 4334 5335 6336 7337 8338
0397 9449 A44A B44B C44C D44D E44E F44F
0404 1551 2552 3553 4554 5555 6556 7557 8558
0412 9669 A66A B66B C66C D66D E66E F66F 0660
0420 1771 2772 3773 4774 5775 6776 7777 8778
0428 9889 A88A B88B C88C D88D E88E F88F

3–4 DAS/DETECTOR
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

3-1 DAS DATA TRANSFER CHECK (continued)

Illustration 3–1 DAS Data Pattern (continued)


0435 1991 2992 3993 4994 5995 6996 7997 8998
0443 9AA9 AAAA BAAB CAAC DAAD EAAE FAAF 0AA0
0451 1BB1 2BB2 3BB3 4BB4 5BB5 6BB6 7BB7 8BB8
0459 9CC9 ACCA BCCB CCCC DCCD ECCE FCCF
0466 1DD1 2DD2 3DD3 4DD4 5DD5 6DD6 7DD7 8DD8
0474 9EE9 AEEA BEEB CEEC DEED EEEE FEEF 0EE0
0482 1FF1 2FF2 3FF3 4FF4 5FF5 6FF6 7FF7 8FF8
0490 9009 A00A B00B C00C D00D E00E F00F
0497 1111 2112 3113 4114 5115 6116 7117 8118
0505 9229 A22A B22B C22C D22D E22E F22F 0220
0513 1331 2332 3333 4334 5335 6336 7337 8338
0521 9449 A44A B44B C44C D44D E44E F44F
0528 1551 2552 3553 4554 5555 6556 7557 8558
0536 9669 A66A B66B C66C D66D E66E F66F 0660
0544 1771 2772 3773 4774 5775 6776 7777 8778
0552 9889 A88A B88B C88C D88D E88E F88F
0559 1991 2992 3993 4994 5995 6996 7997 8998
0567 9AA9 AAAA BAAB CAAC DAAD EAAE FAAF 0AA0
0575 1BB1 2BB2 3BB3 4BB4 5BB5 6BB6 7BB7 8BB8
0583 9CC9 ACCA BCCB CCCC DCCD ECCE FCCF
0590 1DD1 2DD2 3DD3 4DD4 5DD5 6DD6 7DD7 8DD8
0598 9EE9 AEEA BEEB CEEC DEED EEEE FEEF 0EE0
0606 1FF1 2FF2 3FF3 4FF4 5FF5 6FF6 7FF7 8FF8
0614 9009 A00A B00B C00C D00D E00E F00F
0621 1111 2112 3113 4114 5115 6116 7117 8118
0629 9229 A22A B22B C22C D22D E22E F22F 0220
0637 1331 2332 3333 4334 5335 6336 7337 8338
0645 9449 A44A B44B C44C D44D E44E F44F
0652 1551 2552 3553 4554 5555 6556 7557 8558
0660 9669 A66A B66B C66C D66D E66E F66F 0660
0668 1771 2772 3773 4774 5775 6776 7777 8778
0676 9889 A88A B88B C88C D88D E88E F88F

MSB 7 Do not care.


C 0 6 0
6 1: Mode0 (Currently used)
0: Mode1 (for Future used)
5 1: Test Mode
0: Normal Mode
4 CT Sytec 2000i, S 1: 3.6sec scan
0: 2.3sec scan

Do not care. CT Sytec, 3000i, 1: 4.5sec scan


4000i, Plus 0: 1.8 or 2.7sec scan
3 1: CCW or Scout
0: CW
2 1: Scout
0: Axial
1 1: DAS Busy (Incomplete)
0: Complete
0 For future use, currently : 0

3–5 DAS/DETECTOR
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

3-2 DAS OFFSET DATA

Prerequisites for On–Line Check


D X–ray sub–system has been properly calibrated.

D Table/Gantry sub–system has been properly adjusted.

D Ensure that the DAS/Detector has been powered ON for at least two hours prior to performing the following
procedure.

Procedure
1. Perform the Off–Line scan for CW and CCW:

a. Insert the BOOT floppy into the disk drive.

b. Touch the [Maint] key and enter $$ to display the Maintenance menu.

c. Select SUPPORT from the Maintenance menu.

d. Select OFF LINE SCAN from the Support menu.

e. In this menu, perform the following axial scan:

Scan 1 Scan 2
Scan Time :3.6 sec (CT Sytec 2000i, S) Scan Time :3.6 sec (CT Sytec 2000i, S)
2.7 sec (CT Sytec 3000i, 4000i, Plus) 2.7 sec (CT Sytec 3000i, 4000i, Plus)
CW/CCW :CW CW/CCW :CCW
Thickness :10 mm Thickness :10 mm
XG Rotor :Both OFF XG Rotor :Both OFF
(Others) :(defaults) (Others) :(defaults)

3–6 DAS/DETECTOR
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

3-2 DAS OFFSET DATA (continued)


2. Verify that MEAN MAX & MIN data are within specifications without applying Offset File Correction on the
acquired raw data:

a. Select Statistics from the Support menu.

b. Enter 1 (or 2) for the raw data file ID No.

c. Select Fan from the Raw Data Format menu.

d. Select as follows:

OFFSET FILE CORRECTION :(No)


REFERENCE CH. CORRECTION :(No)
NATURAL LOG. CONVERSION :(No)

e. Verify that MEAN MAX & MIN data are within specifications as described below:

MAX MAX
MIN
AVE

MIN MAX
MIN
AVE

MEAN MAX ≤ 1000


MIN ≥ 100
AVE

S.D. MAX
MIN
AVE

f. Press the [END] key.

3–7 DAS/DETECTOR
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

3-2 DAS OFFSET DATA (continued)


3. Verify that S.D. MAX & MIN data are within specifications, by performing Offset File Correction on the acquired
raw data:

a. Select Statistics from the Support menu.

b. Enter 1 (or 2) for the raw data file ID No.

c. Select Fan from the Raw Data Format menu.

d. Select as follows:

OFFSET FILE CORRECTION :(Yes)


REFERENCE CH. CORRECTION :(No)
NATURAL LOG. CONVERSION :(No)

e. Verify that MEAN MAX & MIN and S.D. MAX & MIN data are within specifications as described below:

MAX MAX
MIN
AVE

MIN MAX
MIN
AVE

MEAN MAX ≤ 0.7


MIN ≥ –0.7
AVE

S.D. MAX ≤ 3.5


MIN
AVE

f. Press the [END] key.

3–8 DAS/DETECTOR
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

3-3 LINEARITY CHECK (NO X–RAY)


Note
This check can only be used for CIF Board (2108372).

Precondition
D Ensure that the DAS/Detector has been powered ON for at least two hours prior to performing the following
procedure.

Procedure
1. Preparation:

a. Turn OFF the ‘Scan’ and ‘TBL/Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.

b. Remove the Gantry front and both side covers.

2. Set the jumpers on the CIF board as follows:

a. Set the service switch on the Sub–board to ON.

b. Rotate the Gantry until the DAS assy reaches the 2 o’clock position.

c. Set the service switch on the Sub–board to OFF.

d. Remove the DAS box cover.

e. Set the jumpers on the CIF board to the following position.

Jumper Position
J1 MODE0
J2 CAL
J3 OFF
J4 ON

f. Install the DAS box cover.

g. Turn ON the ‘Scan’ and ‘TBL/Tilt’ switches at the Gantry rear base.

3–9 DAS/DETECTOR
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

3-3 LINEARITY CHECK (NO X–RAY) (continued)


3. Check CAM linearity between x64 and x16 ranges:

a. Perform the following two stationary scans with different SW1 on the CIF board setting:

Scan 1 (File 1) Scan 2 (File 2)


SW1 Position 2 3
Scan Parameter Azimuth :Preset Degree Azimuth :Preset Degree
Scan Time :2.7sec Scan Time :2.7sec
Thickness :10.0mm Thickness :10.0mm
XG, Rotor :Both OFF XG, Rotor :Both OFF
(Others) :(defaults) (Others) :(defaults)

Note
The SW1 is used to change range as follows:

F 0 1
E 2
D 3
C 4
B 5
A 6
9 8 7

Switch Position of Range to be set CAL Voltage to be generated


SW1
2 x64 Boundary voltage between x64 and x16
3 x16 Boundary voltage between x64 and x16
4 x16 Boundary voltage between x16 and x4
5 x4 Boundary voltage between x16 and x4
6 x4 Boundary voltage between x4 and x1
7 x1 Boundary voltage between x4 and x1

3–10 DAS/DETECTOR
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

3-3 LINEARITY CHECK (NO X–RAY) (continued)


b. Obtain Mean Files from the acquired raw data:

i. Select Statistics from the Support menu.

ii. Enter 1 (2) for the raw data file ID No.

iii. Select Fan from the Raw Data Format menu.

iv. Select as follows:

OFFSET FILE CORRECTION :(No)


REFERENCE CH. CORRECTION :(No)
NATURAL LOG. CONVERSION :(No)

v. Select Mean from the Kind of Data menu.

vi. Select Store File.

vii. Enter 1 (2) as the Mean File No.

c. Apply a division to the Mean File:

i. Select Calculation with Mean File from the Support menu.

ii. Select File1 / File2, and enter 1 for File1, and enter 2 for File2.

iii. Select Store File, and enter 3 as the Mean File No.

d. Check the calculated Mean Files using Support Display:

i. Select Support Display menu from the Maintenance menu.

ii. Select File Selection, and enter the parameters as follows:

Enter FILE NAME = M


RANGE
MAX = 0
MIN = 1000

iii. Select Set Cursor, and enter as follows:

1 for Channel
3 for Data

iv. Select Profile(H), and enter as follows:

0.99 for MIN DATA


1.01 for MAX DATA

A graph is drawn, as is shown in illustration 3–2. Verify that the graph is in the following range:
0.999 ≤ ≤ 1.001

e. Press the [END] key.

3–11 DAS/DETECTOR
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

3-3 LINEARITY CHECK (NO X–RAY) (continued)


4. Perform the same check as above for the Linearity between x16 and x4 ranges and Linearity between x4 and
x1 ranges.

5. Set the jumpers on the CIF board to normal position.

6. Restore the Gantry to original configuration.

Illustration 3–2 Linearity

Start Point Start Point


CH 1 CH 400
Data 3 Data 3

3–12 DAS/DETECTOR
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

X–RAY GENERATOR

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION PAGE

SECTION 1 – XG COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1


1-1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1-2 DISTRIBUTION VOLTAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
1-3 MAIN DC POWER (+VCC, –VCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3
1-4 DC POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4
1-5 CORE REACTOR SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–6
1-5-1 Troidal–Core Reactor Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–6
1-5-2 Air–Core Reactor Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–9
1-6 FIL CONT ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–11
1-7 ROTOR CONT ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–12
1-7-1 Operation Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–12
1-7-2 Stator Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–14
1-7-3 Offset Adjustment of Operational Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–15
1-8 POWER CONT ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–16
1-8-1 KV Feedback Safeties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–16
1-8-2 Operational Check (Status Detection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17
1-8-3 KV Control Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–19
1-9 FANS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–23

SECTION 2 – GENERATOR OUTPUT CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1


2-1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2-2 GENERATOR PRIMARY CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2-3 DAS COUNT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9
2-4 KV AND MA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–11

i X–RAY GENERATOR
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
blank 2234976

ii X–RAY GENERATOR
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

SECTION 1 – XG COMPONENTS

1-1 GENERAL

Illustration 1–1 XG Cabinet

FRONT VIEW RIGHT SIDE VIEW REAR VIEW

1–1 X–RAY GENERATOR


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-2 DISTRIBUTION VOLTAGES


The XG cabinet includes the system transformer (T1) from which the appropriate type of power is supplied to the other
subsystems.

1. Turn OFF the main power switch on OC.

2. Remove the rear cover from the XG cabinet.

3. Turn ON the main power switch on the OC.

4. Measure the voltages on the terminal plates TM1 and TM2.

Verify that they are within the specifications described in Table below.

Measurement Terminals Specification (A.C.V)


TM1 10–11 100 ± 10
TM2 6–7 100 ± 10
TM2 4–5 115 ± 11.5
TM2 1–2 200 ± 20
TM2 2–3 200 ± 20
TM2 3–1 200 ± 20

5. Install the rear cover.

Illustration 1–2 XG Cabinet (Rear View)

TM1 TM2

1–2 X–RAY GENERATOR


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-3 MAIN DC POWER (+VCC, –VCC)


The main D.C. power (+VCC, –VCC) supplied to HV INV Assy, FIL CONT Assy and the transistor modules of the rotor
controller can be measured on the terminals TM1 on FIL CONT Assy.

1. Turn OFF the main power switch on OC.

2. Remove the right side cover from the XG cabinet.

3. Turn ON the main power switch on the OC.

4. Measure the voltages on the terminal plate TM1 of the FIL CONT Assy.

Verify that they are within the specifications described in Table below.

Measurement Terminals Specifications (D.C.)


TM1 1–2
TM1 2–3 (Line Voltage) X √2 ± 10%
TM1 3–1

Also, verify that the voltage falls to less than 50V about 45 seconds after the system is powered OFF.

5. Install the right side cover.

Illustration 1–3 FIL Cont Assy Location

FIL CONT Assy

1–3 X–RAY GENERATOR


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-4 DC POWER SUPPLY

Overview
There are 4 DC Power Supplies installed in the XG cabinet.

D PS1 .................................. supplies +24V for MRT Cont Assy relays and Power On Lamp.

D PS2 .................................. supplies +5V and +15V for the Power Cont Assy circuits.

D PS3 .................................. supplies +24V for Power Cont Assy buzzer, counter and relay
which are controlled by the Power Cont Assy.

D PS4 .................................. supplies +5V and +15V for the INV Cont Assy circuits.

DC Power for the FIL Cont Assy is produced on the board itself. For PS1 and PS4, DC voltages are measured on
the output terminals of the power supplies, while DC outputs of PS2 and PS3 are measured on the Power Cont Assy.

Procedure
1. Turn OFF the main power switch on OC.

2. Remove the front and right side covers from the XG cabinet to access the Power Cont Assy and power supplies.

3. Turn ON the main power switch on OC.

4. Check DC power supply voltages, according to Table below.

Table 1–1 Power Supply Specifications

DC Voltage Power Measurement Point Specification


Supply
S pply
Voltage Ripple
+5V PS2 Power Cont Assy TP17 – TP18(GND) +5.0V ∼ +5.3V < 50mV
PS4 Output Terminal G1(GND)
+15V PS2 Power Cont Assy TP19 – TP20(GND) +5.0V ∼ +5.9V < 150mV
PS4 Output Terminal G2(GND)
–15V PS2 Power Cont Assy TP21 – TP20(GND) –15V ± 0.9V <150mV
PS4 Output Terminal G2(GND)
+24V PS3 Power Cont Assy TP23 – TP22(GND) +24.0V ∼ +26.4V –
PS1 Output Terminal

Verify that the power supply voltages are within specifications.


If not, adjust the voltage with the appropriate potentiometer (except +15V/–15V power supplies).

1–4 X–RAY GENERATOR


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-4 DC POWER SUPPLY (continued)


5. Check +15V/–15V power supply voltages on the FIL Cont Assy, according to Table below.

Table 1–2 Output Voltage Specifications

DC Voltage Test Point Specification


Voltage Ripple
+15V TP9 – TP10(GND) +15V ± 0.9V <150mV
–15V TP11 – TP10(GND) –15V ± 0.9V <150mV

Verify that the output voltages are within specifications.

6. Install the front and right side covers.

1–5 X–RAY GENERATOR


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-5 CORE REACTOR SETTING

1-5-1 Troidal–Core Reactor Setting


Verify the toroidal–core reactor settings above the HV Tanks are correct, at the time of the x–ray generator installation,
or after you have replaced the HV Tanks, or in other situations where the toroidal–core reactor settings are disrupted.
Check for the following toroidal–core reactor wirings.

1. Preparation:

a. Turn OFF the OC main power.

b. Turn OFF the breaker in the Power Distribution Box (hospital supply).

c. Remove the front, rear, and right side covers from the XG cabinet.

2. Verify that the wire length (K5;safety contactor ∼ K9;L short contactor) is 350mm ± 10mm.

L Short
Contactor
1 5 1 5
K9 K5

2 6 2 6
Safety
Contactor

3. Verify that the wiring of the HV Tank and Inverter is the following:

D Insert the long side of the Coil1 cable into the CT1 or CT2, and connect it to the Inverter terminal, then
tie–wraps the CT1 and CT2 onto the Coil1 cables.

D Connect the short side of the Coil1 cable to the HV Tank terminals. Note the connecting directions.

CT2
Long Cable
CT1
Coil1

Coil1

Short Cable Long Cable

Short Cable

Connecting Direction of
Rear Short Cables

1–6 X–RAY GENERATOR


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-5-1 Troidal–Core Reactor Setting (continued)


4. Verify that the wiring of the K5 and HV Tank is the following:

D Connect the long side of the Coil2 cable to the K5 terminal 2 or 6.

D Connect the short side of the Coil2 cable to the HV Tank terminals.

Long Cable
Coil2
Short Cable

Coil2 Long Cable


Short Cable

Connecting Direction of
Short Cables

5. Verify that the wiring of the K9 is the following:

D Connect the long side of the Coil3 cables to the terminal 1 or 5 of K9.

D Connect the short side of the Coil3 cables to the terminals 2 and 6 of K9.

Long Cable

1 5 1 5
K9 K5

2 6 2 6

Short
Cable

Coil3

1–7 X–RAY GENERATOR


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-5-1 Troidal–Core Reactor Setting (continued)


6. Verify that the wire length (K9 ∼ Inverters) is 800mm ± 10mm.

Wire

7. Insert the coil shaft into the coil holes while installing the spacer(P9156FU) between coils (see illustration below).

REAR VIEW
For N HV Tank and N Inverter
Coil1

Coil2

Coil3

Spacer Shaft
Coil3

Coil2

Coil1

For P HV Tank and P Inverter

8. Using tie–wrap, clamp the coil cables so that the shaded area in the illustration below is the smallest. For both
P and N inverter output circuits, perform this procedure.

Coil3

K4 K5
Coil2

Inverter HV Tank

Coil1

9. Restore the XG cabinet to original configuration.

1–8 X–RAY GENERATOR


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-5-2 Air–Core Reactor Setting


Verify the air–core reactor settings above the HV Tanks are correct, at the time of the x–ray generator installation,
or after you have replaced the HV Tanks, or in other situations where the air–core reactor settings are disrupted. Refer
to illustration 1–4 and check the following:

D The Inverter output wires (P and N) go through the current transformers CT1 and CT2 respectively. Each
wire go through the transformer hole once. Each current transformer is fixed on the wire with tie–wraps.

D Each air–core reactor (4 in all) dimensions are 4 turns, approximately 90mm in diameter.

D The winding direction of the air–core reactors are:

– When the Inverter output currents flow in the directions indicated by the arrows, the air–core reac-
tors produce the magnetic flux in the directions indicated by the arrows.

– Both the two air–core reactors that are placed in series (indicated by R and S) should produce
the magnetic flux in the same direction for a given Inverter output current.

D The four air–core reactors are placed so that each magnetic flux produced by each reactor intersects per-
pendicularly with each other.

D The lowest parts of the four air–core reactors are positioned approximately 5cm above the Tank surfaces.
Hang the reactors from the Heat sink frame, or INV support, using tie–wraps, if necessary.

D The loop areas created by the Inverter output wires are kept small; that the two Inverter output wires should
go together as much as possible on both P and N sides.

1–9 X–RAY GENERATOR


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-5-2 Air–Core Reactor Setting (continued)

Illustration 1–4 Air–Core Reactors

(A) (B)

micro:textL8

L Short
Tie–wrap Contactor
1 5 1 5
K9 K5

90mm

2 6 2 6
4 Turns Safety
Contactor

micro:textC
micro:textC8
(C) (D)
Inverter Output
Terminal (N)
Inverter Output
Terminal (P)
CT1
K9 K5

K9
R K5

CT2

S
Magnetic
Flux P HV TANK Magnetic
N HV TANK Flux

(A) : Air–core Dimensions


(B) : Connection between K5 (safety contactor) and K9 (L short contactor)
(C) : Air–core reactor connection on the N HV TANK side
(D) : Air–core reactor connection on the P HV TANK side

1–10 X–RAY GENERATOR


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-6 FIL CONT ASSY

Waveform Check
1. Remove the front and right side covers from the XG cabinet.

2. Turn OFF the CB6 circuit breaker.

3. Connect an oscilloscope to TP3 and TP4(ground: AG) of FIL Cont Assy.

4. Turn ON the CB6 circuit breaker.

5. Verify the waveforms, and verify that the peak amplitudes does not exceed 10V.

6. Disconnect the oscilloscope, and install the front and right side covers.

Illustration 1–5 CB6 Location

CB6

Illustration 1–6 Filament Heating Voltage and Current (Pre–Heating)

5ms/div
10V/diV
A
TP4

TP3 A

1–11 X–RAY GENERATOR


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-7 ROTOR CONT ASSY

1-7-1 Operation Sequence


By using the start switch (S11:this switch invokes the sequence) on the INV Cont board, check the rotor operation
sequence with the LEDs (see that the LEDs illuminate in the sequence shown in illustration .
Also, check the rotor operation by listening to the sound. When the rotor controller is not working, only HSPD LED
should illuminate (jumper J1 installed); however, immediately after the system powered ON, OC LED might illuminate,
which will be extinguished by switching on the start switch.

Illustration 1–7 Rotor Operation Sequence

Indicates that the LED is lit.

Switch ON
START
SWITCH

LEDs
START

HSPD
ta
ACC

RUN
tb
BRK

RRYL

BRYL

OC

EXPINTL

1–12 X–RAY GENERATOR


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-7 ROTOR CONT ASSY (continued)

1-7-1 Operation Sequence (continued)


1. Remove the front cover from the XG cabinet.

2. Connect the cable between the connectors CN1 and CN15 to enable the Off–Line exposure mode.

3. Check acceleration and brake times:

a. Set the SW4 (XG ON) switch on the Power Cont board to ON.

b. Measure the acceleration time with a stopwatch.

Measure also the brake time by switching OFF the SW4 (XG ON) switch.

c. Verify that the times should be approximately the following:

Acceleration (HSPD) : 3.5 sec


Brake (HSPD) : 7.8 sec

4. Check the safety contactor operation:

a. Set the SW4 switch on the Power Cont board to ON.

b. Verify that the safety contactor (K5) is energized after the rotor reaches the running state, by hearing the
sound.

c. Set the SW4 switch on the Power Cont board to OFF.

5. Restore the XG to original configuration.

1–13 X–RAY GENERATOR


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-7 ROTOR CONT ASSY (continued)

1-7-2 Stator Current


1. Remove the rear and right side covers from the XG cabinet.

2. Using a clip–on meter, measure the stator current at around the terminal TM7.

Check that they are within the specifications described in Table below.

Table 1–3 Stator Current

States Specification
BLK Cable GRN Cable
RUN (HSPD) 1.0 ± 0.3 (AC) 2.0 ± 0.6 (AC)
BRK –0.4 ± 0.8 (DC) 4.0 ± 0.8 (DC)

The specifications in Table 1–3 are valid when the mains supply (3 phase) is 200V; also the specifications might
change according to the load.

Illustration 1–8 TM7 Location

TM7

3. Install the rear and right side covers.

1–14 X–RAY GENERATOR


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-7 ROTOR CONT ASSY (continued)

1-7-3 Offset Adjustment of Operational Amplifier


1. Remove the rear and right side covers from the XG cabinet.

2. Connect the cable between the connectors CN1 and CN15 to enable the off–line exposure mode.

3. On the INV Cont board there are operational amplifiers for the run state current detection.

Measure the offset on the (G1 and W1 test points – GND) on the INV Cont board with a multimeter.

Check that they are within the specifications described in Table below.
If not, adjust the voltage with the appropriate volume.

Table 1–4 Output Voltage Specifications

Test Point Specification Adjustment Volume


G1 within ± 10mV VR1
W1 within ± 10mV VR2

4. Restore the XG to original configuration.

1–15 X–RAY GENERATOR


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-8 POWER CONT ASSY

1-8-1 KV Feedback Safeties


1. Remove the front cover from the XG cabinet.

2. Connect the cable between the connectors CN1 and CN15 to enable the off–line exposure mode.

3. Check the KV feedback safety (kV feedback voltages on positive side):

a. Disconnect the CN6 connector on the Power Cont Assy.

b. Verify that one of the LEDs OVP1, OVP4 or both is lit, and that XG FAIL–D22 is lit (XG FAIL–D1 is OFF).

c. After checking, connect the CN6 connector, and push SW2 (Reset) to reset the XG FAIL status.

4. Check the KV feedback safety (kV feedback voltages on negative side):

a. Disconnect the CN9 connector on the Power Cont Assy.

b. Verify that on of the LEDs OVN1, OVN4 or both is lit, and that XG FAIL–D22 is lit (XG FAIL–D1 is OFF).

c. After checking, connect the CN9 connector, and push SW2 (Reset) to reset the XG FAIL.

5. Restore the XG to original configuration.

1–16 X–RAY GENERATOR


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-8 POWER CONT ASSY (continued)

1-8-2 Operational Check (Status Detection)


1. Remove the front cover from the XG cabinet.

2. Connect the cable between the connectors CN1 and CN15 to enable the off–line exposure mode.

3. Power ON the system, and check the LEDs on the Power Cont Assy.

LED D22 (XG FAIL) : extinguished


LED D1 (XG FAIL) : lit
LED D2 (POWER) : lit
Relay K4 : energized in about 6 seconds after power on
LEDs D39 ∼ D50 (PWR11 ∼ 0) : some of them are lit

CAUTION
X–ray exposure is performed in this procedure; take appropriate precautions.

Do not make exposure for longer than 5 seconds at a time.

Tube cooling: The tube cooling algorithm is not used during off–line exposure. Exposure
must be performed with great care when initiated as manual x–ray exposure. Allow the tube
to cool for minimum cooling time listed in table after each exposure. Failure to heed this cau-
tion will drastically shorten the tube life due to target focal spot damage, overheated rotor
bearings, or other tube unit problems related to overheating.

4. Switch up and down the switches SW5 ∼ SW9 (KV1, KV0, MA2, MA1, MA0), and check that the corresponding
LEDs (D17 ∼ D21) are lit.

a. Set 120kV, 40mA.

b. Switch ON SW4(XG ON), and check the LEDs on the Power Cont Assy.

LED D16 (XG ON) :lit


LED D3 (XG ACT) :lit
Safety Contactor (K5) :energized
LED D5 (XG RDY) :lit
LED D15 (XG RDY) :lit

c. Switch ON SW3(HV ON), and check the LEDs on the Power Cont Assy.

LED D14 (HV ON) :lit


Exposure Counter :increased by a half–number
LEDs D39 ∼ D50 (PWR11 ∼ 0) : some of them are lit (these will be changed every 0.5 second)

d. Switch OFF the SW3 and SW4.

1–17 X–RAY GENERATOR


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-8 POWER CONT ASSY (continued)

1-8-2 Operational Check (Status Detection) (continued)


5. Check Reset function:

a. Disconnect the CN5 connector and check the LEDs on the Power Cont assy.

LED D22 (XG FAIL) :lit


LED D1 (XG FAIL) :extinguished These will be changed every 0.5 second.
Relay K4 :de–energized

b. Connect the CN5 connector and check the LEDs on the Power Cont Assy.

LED D22 (XG FAIL) :extinguished


LED D1 (XG FAIL) :lit
Relay K4 :energized several seconds later
LEDs D39 ∼ D50 (PWR11 ∼ 0) :extinguished and then indicate some data after relay K4 is energized.

c. Perform the same checks described in previous steps ( a. and b.) for CN8.

d. Perform the same checks described in previous steps ( a. and b.) for CN17.

e. Push and hold SW2 (Reset) switch, and perform the same checks described in previous step a.

Also check that LEDs D39 ∼ D50 (PWR11 ∼ PWR0) are extinguished.

f. Release SW2 (Reset) switch, and perform the same checks described in previous step a.

6. Restore the XG to original configuration.

1–18 X–RAY GENERATOR


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-8 POWER CONT ASSY (continued)

1-8-3 KV Control Circuits


1. Preparation:

a. Remove the front cover from the XG cabinet.

b. Connect the cable between the connectors CN1 and CN15 to enable the Off–Line exposure mode.

2. Check the TRIG Pulse:

a. Connect the oscilloscope to TP1 – (DG GND) on the Power Cont Assy.
(2V/div, 5msec/div, or 0.1msec/div)

b. Observe the waveform (see illustration 1–9).

Illustration 1–9 TRIG Pulse (40KHz)

500nsec
25msec

1–19 X–RAY GENERATOR


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-8 POWER CONT ASSY (continued)

1-8-3 KV Control Circuits (continued)


3. Check Dive Pulse:

a. Set the jumper J6 to the TEST position.

b. Set the following:

120kV and 40mA


‘00H’ on SW10 (all bits to ON)

c. Disconnect the CN4 and CN7 connectors (MOSFET drive signals).

d. Push SW1 (TEST) on the Power Cont Assy.

e. Connect the oscilloscope on TP31, TP32, TP33 and TP34 (DG GND).
(2V/div, 5 or 2 msec/div)

f. Switch ON SW4 (XG ON) and SW3 (HV ON), and verify that the waveform as shown in illustration 1–10.
(X–ray exposure will not be made.)
Switch OFF SW3 and SW4 switches.

g. Switch ON the SW4 and SW3 switches, and while holding SW3 (HV ON) switch, push SW1 (TEST), and
check that the waveforms on TP31, TP32, TP33 and TP34 become constant 0V.
Switch OFF the SW3 and SW4 switches.

Illustration 1–10 Drive Pulse

10.5

TP34

10.5
2 2
TP34

10.5

TP34

10.5
2 2
TP34
6

1–20 X–RAY GENERATOR


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-8 POWER CONT ASSY (continued)

1-8-3 KV Control Circuits (continued)


4. Check ON Pulse:

a. Set the jumper J7 to the MNL position.

b. Connect the oscilloscope to TP2 and TP3 (DG GND).


(2V/div, 5msec/div)

c. Turn RV1 to the CCW limit.

d. Switch ON the SW4 and SW3 switches, and check that the constant 0V is observed on TP2 and TP3.
While turning RV1 in the CW direction, observe that the ON Pulses become wider and that they become
constant +5V with RV1 in the CW limit (see illustration 1–11).

e. Switch OFF the SW4 and SW3 switches.

f. Set the jumper J7 to the FB position.

Illustration 1–11 ON Pulse

ON

TP2

ON

TP3

1–21 X–RAY GENERATOR


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-8 POWER CONT ASSY (continued)

1-8-3 KV Control Circuits (continued)


5. Check KV Reference:

a. Connect the storage oscilloscope to TP8 and TP31 (AG GND).


(2V/div, 2msec/div TP31:for positive trigger)

b. Set 120kV and 40mA.

c. Switch ON the SW4 and SW3 switches, and verify that the waveform is as shown in illustration 1–12.

d. Switch OFF the SW4 and SW3 switches.

e. Connect the multimeter to TP8 (AG GND).

f. Switch ON the SW4 and SW3 switches, and confirm that the voltage of 6.80V ± 0.136V is measured.

g. Switch OFF the SW4 and SW3 switches.

6. Restore the Power Cont Assy to original configuration.

7. Push SW2 (Reset) button.

Illustration 1–12 KV Reference

6.80V

HV ON

10.4msec ± 1msec

1–22 X–RAY GENERATOR


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

1-9 FANS
1. Turn OFF the OC main power.

2. Remove the front, rear and right side covers from the XG cabinet.

3. Turn ON the OC main power, and verify that the three Fans are operating normally.

4. Restore the XG to original configuration.

Illustration 1–13 Fan Location

REAR VIEW

FANs

FAN of the HV INV Assy

1–23 X–RAY GENERATOR


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
blank 2234976

1–24 X–RAY GENERATOR


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

SECTION 2 – GENERATOR OUTPUT CHECK

2-1 GENERAL

CAUTION
X–ray exposure is performed in this procedure; take appropriate precautions.

Do not make exposure for longer than 5 seconds at a time.

Tube cooling: The tube cooling algorithm is not used during off–line exposure. Exposure
must be performed with great care when initiated as manual x–ray exposure. Allow the tube
to cool for minimum cooling time listed in table after each exposure. Failure to heed this cau-
tion will drastically shorten the tube life due to target focal spot damage, overheated rotor
bearings, or other tube unit problems related to overheating.

Table 2–1 Cooling Time

mA Exposure Time Cooling Time


40mA 5 sec 10 sec
60mA ∼ 100mA 5 sec 30 sec
130mA ∼ 160mA 5.sec 60 sec

Table 2–2 kV and mA Setting

KV Switches LEDs mA Switches LEDs


SW5 SW6 D17 D18 SW7 SW8 SW9 D19 D20 D21
(KV1) (KV0) (KV1) (KV0) (MA2) (MA1) (MA0) (MA2) (MA1) (MA0)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
80 0 1 0 1 40 0 0 1 0 0 1
120 1 0 1 0 60 0 1 0 0 1 0
140 1 1 1 1 80 0 1 1 0 1 1
100 1 0 0 1 0 0
130 1 0 1 1 0 1
160 1 1 0 1 1 0
0:Down 0:Off 0:Down 0:Off
1:Up 1:Lit 1:Up 1:Lit

2–1 X–RAY GENERATOR


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-2 GENERATOR PRIMARY CHECK


1. Preparation:

a. Remove the front and right side covers from the XG cabinet.

b. Connect a digital multimeter to the terminals 5(PMA–H) and 6(PMA–L:GND) of the Tank Conn Assy located
on the positive high voltage Tank. (Select the multimeter for DC measurement.)

c. Push SW2 (Reset) button on the Power Cont Assy.

d. Set TM1 of the SW10 dip switch to OFF.

ON SW10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
TM0 TM7

e. Turn RV1 and RV2 on the Power Cont Assy to the CCW limits.

f. Set the dial switches SW14(FIL3) ∼ SW11(FIL0) to ‘C400’.


(FIL3 → C, FIL2 → 4, FIL1 → 0, FIL0 → 0)

g. Disconnect the cable from CN1 connector, then connect the jumper cable from CN15 to the connector CN1.
This allows Off–Line exposure.

h. Push SW2 (Reset) button on the Power Cont Assy.

2. Under KV Safeties:

a. Set 120kV 0mA on SW5 ∼ SW9 (refer to Table 2–2).

b. Disconnect the connectors CN4 and CN7 (MOSFET drive signals).

c. Switch ON SW4(XGON) and SW3(HV ON) switches.

After exposure terminated, switch OFF the SW4 and SW3 switches.

Verify that the LEDs on the Power Cont Assy and Safety Contactor is the following conditions:

LED D27 (DVP4) :lit


LED D28 (DVN4) :lit
LED D22 (XG FAIL) :lit
LED D1 (XG FAIL) :extinguished
Safety Contactor :de–energized

d. Connect cables to CN4 and CN7.

2–2 X–RAY GENERATOR


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-2 GENERATOR PRIMARY CHECK (continued)


3. KV Primary Current (HV Inverter Outputs):

a. Set 120kv, 40mA on SW5 ∼ SW9 (refer to Table 2–2).

b. Switch ON SW4(XGON) and SW3(HV ON) switches.

Confirm that the KV meter indicates about 12kV.

Switch OFF the SW4 and SW3 switches.

c. Switch ON SW4(XGON) and SW3(HV ON) switches.

Turn RV1 and RV2 fully cw so that the KV meter indicates 120kV.

Switch OFF the SW4 and SW3 switches.

d. Push SW1(TEST) button. Verify that the LEDs on the Power Cont Assy is the following conditions:

D35 ∼ D38 (ST0 ∼ ST3) :Blink


D50 ∼ D39 (PWR11 ∼ PWR0) :indicate ‘400H’

e. Switch ON SW4(XGON) and SW3(HV ON) switches.

The mA meter will gradually increase: hold SW3 until stable 40mA ± 2mA current is obtained.

Switch OFF the SW4 and SW3 switches.

f. Connect storage type oscilloscope to TP6 and TP24 on the Power Cont Assy, where KV primary currents can
be observed.

TP6 :Positive side


TP24 :Negative side
AG :Ground

g. Switch ON SW4(XGON) and SW3(HV ON) switches several times, and

See that the peak amplitudes of all the pulses observed do not exceed 3.0V. Also see that the pulse control is
carried out (see illustration 2–4).

Switch OFF the SW4 and SW3 switches.

2–3 X–RAY GENERATOR


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-2 GENERATOR PRIMARY CHECK (continued)

Illustration 2–4 KV Primary Currents

(a) Immediately after HV ON (b) Stable Output


(20µs/div, 2V/div) (5µs/div, 1V/div)

Note
Pulse Control: In this control, when the load (for the inverter) is large, the output pulse widths of the
inverter are made wide and when the load is small, the pulse widths are made narrower. Immediately
after HV ON, the load for the inverter is considered to be short–circuited, so the peak amplitudes of
output pulses become larger ( a in illustration 2–4); the widths of output pulses are decided by over
current operation. When the generator outputs are stabilized, waveforms like b in illustration are
seen.

2–4 X–RAY GENERATOR


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-2 GENERATOR PRIMARY CHECK (continued)


4. mA Check:

a. Connect a digital multimeter to the terminals 5(PMA–H) and 6(PMA–L:GND) of the Tank Conn Assy.

b. Switch ON SW4(XGON) and SW3(HV ON) switches.

Check that the output voltage is –0.1V ± 0.005V.

Switch OFF the SW4 and SW3 switches.

c. Connect the digital multimeter to the terminals 5(NMA–H) and 6(NMA–L:GND) of the Tank Conn Assy (nega-
tive side).

Perform the same check as in step a. It must be 0.1V ± 0.005V.

d. Disconnect the digital multimeter.

e. Perform x–ray exposures and read the voltage values:

Verify that the mA meter stability is within the following specifications

Table 2–3 mA Meter Stability

mA Meter Stability
40 40mA ± 2mA
60 60mA ± 3mA
80 80mA ± 4mA
100 100mA ± 5mA
130 130mA ± 7mA
160 160mA ± 8mA

f. Check the KV Primary Current (perform steps 3f. and 3g.).

2–5 X–RAY GENERATOR


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-2 GENERATOR PRIMARY CHECK (continued)


5. KV Waveforms:

a. Connect the storage oscilloscope to TP9 and TP11 the Power Cont Assy, where KV Feedback Voltages can
be observed.

TP9 :Positive side


TP11 :Negative side
TP31 :Positive Trigger
AG :Ground

b. Switch ON SW4(XGON) switch, and switch ON SW3(HV ON) switch to get the KV rise waveforms, then
switch OFF SW4.

Check that the both waveforms reach –6.8V in 8 ∼ 10 msec after HV ON (see illustration 2–5).

c. Disconnect the storage oscilloscope.

Illustration 2–5 KV Rise Waveforms (mA=160mA)

TP9

TP11

(2mS/div, 5.00V/div)

2–6 X–RAY GENERATOR


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-2 GENERATOR PRIMARY CHECK (continued)


6. mA Adjustment:

a. Connect a digital multimeter to the terminals 5(PMA–H) and 6(PMA–L:GND) of the Tank Conn Assy.

b. Perform x–ray exposures, and read the voltage values:

Verify that the output voltage is –0.4V ± 0.02V.

c. Perform the same check for the negative side (5:NMA–H, 6:NMA–L).

It should be 0.4V ± 0.02V.

d. Set the dial switches (SW13(FIL2)∼SW11(FIL0)) to the indicated code (LEDs:D39 ∼ D50)

Illustration 2–6 LEDs on the Power Cont Assy

D39 D40 D41 D42 D43 D44 D45 D46 D47 D48 D49 D50

PWR11 PWR0
(MSB) (MSB)

SW13 (FIL2) SW12 (FIL1) SW11 (FIL0)

7. Over mA Safeties:

a. Turn the SW13 in the CW direction to increase the LEDs code on the Power Cont Assy by 1.

b. Push SW2 (Reset) button on the Power Cont Assy.

c. Set 120kv, 40mA on SW5 ∼ SW9 (refer to Table 2–2).

d. Switch OFF SW4(XGON) and SW3(HV ON) switches, few second later, switch OFF the SW4 and SW3
switches.

Verify that the LEDs on the Power Cont Assy is the following conditions:

D29 (OLP) :lit


D30 (OLN) :lit
D22 (XG FAIL) :lit

e. Turn the SW13 in the CCW direction to decrease the LEDs code on the Power Cont Assy by 1.

f. Push SW2 (Reset) button on the Power Cont Assy.

2–7 X–RAY GENERATOR


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-2 GENERATOR PRIMARY CHECK (continued)


8. Exposure Backup Timer:

a. Set 120kv, 40mA on SW5 ∼ SW9 (refer to Table 2–2).

b. Switch ON SW4(XGON) and SW3(HV ON) switches.

Hold the SW3 switch until the exposure backup timer causes the exposure to be terminated
(about 15 seconds later).

Verify that the following LEDs illuminate:

D37 (ST1)
D22 (XG FAIL)

c. Switch OFF the SW4 and SW3 switches.

d. Set 120kv, 100mA on SW5 ∼ SW9 (refer to Table 2–2).

e. Switch ON SW4(XGON) and SW3(HV ON) switches.

Hold the SW3 switch until the exposure backup timer causes the exposure to be terminated
(about 5.6 seconds later).

f. Verify that the following LEDs illuminate:

D38 (ST0)
D22 (XG FAIL)

g. Switch OFF the SW4 and SW3 switches.

9. Set 120kV 0mA on SW5 ∼ SW9 (refer to Table 2–2).

10. Set TM1 of the SW10 dip switch to ON.

11. Disconnect the jumper cable from CN1 connector, then connect the cable from OC to the connector CN1.
(This allows On–Line Mode.)

12. Restore the XG to original configuration.

2–8 X–RAY GENERATOR


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-3 DAS COUNT

DANGER!!
IN THIS SECTION, THE X–RAY EXPOSURE IS PREFORMED. ALWAYS VERIFY
THAT NO PEOPLE IS IN THE SCAN ROOM WHENEVER SCAN IS PERFORMED.

Note
Make sure that the bow–tie filter is in place before starting this check.

1. Perform stationary scan:

a. Insert the BOOT floppy into the disk drive.

b. Touch the [Maint] key and enter $$ to display the Maintenance menu.

c. Select SUPPORT from the Maintenance menu.

d. Select OFF LINE SCAN from the Support menu.

e. Perform the following stationary scan:

Azimuth : Present Degree


Scan Time : 3.6 sec (CT Sytec 2000i, S)
2.7 sec (CT Sytec, 3000i,4000i, Plus)
CW/CCW : CW
Thickness : 10 mm
KV : 120 KV
mA : 40mA, 100mA and 160mA
(Others) : (defaults)

2–9 X–RAY GENERATOR


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 2 2234976

2-3 DAS COUNT (continued)


2. Verify that the MEAN (MAX) data is within specifications:

a. Select Statistics from the Support menu.

b. Enter the same series number as entered in the OFF LINE SCAN.

c. Select Fan from the Raw Data Format menu.

d. Select as follows:

OFFSET FILE CORRECTION :(Yes)


REFERENCE CH. CORRECTION :(No)
NATURAL LOG. CONVERSION :(No)

e. Select Mean from the Kind of Data menu.

f. Select Display.

g. Verify that 1cn∼6ch MEAN data are within the following specifications.

Table 2–4 DAS Count

CT Sytec 2000i, S CT Sytec 3000i, 4000i, Plus


1ch ∼ 6ch 40mA 3800 ≤ Mean (Max) ≤ 8700 2900 ≤ Mean (Max) ≤ 6500
100mA 9500 ≤ Mean (Max) ≤ 21700 7100 ≤ Mean (Max) ≤ 16300
160mA 16800 ≤ Mean ≤ 31600 12600 ≤ Mean ≤ 23700

2–10 X–RAY GENERATOR


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-4 KV AND MA
The x–ray system has a KV regulation loop. Circuit on the Power Cont Assy controls the generator outputs with feed-
back voltages until they reach the specified outputs (+60kV and –60kV, i.e., 120kV). You can vary the output KV with
potentiometer RV2. However, the factory calibrates the KV feedback and control circuits with RV2 at he CW limit posi-
tion; so basically, the RV2 potentiometer is only used to test the circuitry.

The XG system also has an mA regulation loop; the CPU on the Power Cont Assy controls the generator output current
with its feedback voltages until it reaches the specified output. The CPU uses the code set by dial switches SW1 ∼
SW14 as the filament heating reference at the time of filament boost, to quickly reach the specified generator output
current. Make the dial switch settings at the 160mA generator output. The CPU calculates and applies the boost refer-
ence for all the other mA stations.

Before you begin the following checks and adjustments, verify that the x–ray tube heat exchanger fan is operating.
The potentiometer and switches referenced in the following adjustment are all located on the Power Cont Assy. The
KV and mA meters are located in the top of the cabinet front panel.

1. Preparation:

a. Remove the front and right side covers from the XG cabinet.

b. Set the dial switches SW14(FIL3) ∼ SW11(FIL0) to ‘0400’.


(FIL3 → 0, FIL2 → 4, FIL1 → 0, FIL0 → 0)

c. Disconnect the cable from CN1 connector, then connect the jumper cable from CN15 to the connector CN1.
This allows Off–Line exposure.

d. Push SW2 (Reset) button on the Power Cont Assy.

2. Turn the RV2 potentiometer on the Power Cont Assy to CCW limit.

3. Check that the KV value indicated on the meter:

a. Set 120kv, 40mA on SW5 ∼ SW9 (refer to Table 2–2).

b. Switch ON the SW4(XGON) switch, and listen for the rotor in operation.

c. Switch ON the SW3(HV ON) switch, and verify that the KV meter needle moves a little.

Turn the RV2 potentiometer to CW limit, and verify that the KV meter indicates 120kV ± 3kV.

d. Switch OFF the SW4 and SW3 switches.

(The mA meter needle may move slightly.)

2–11 X–RAY GENERATOR


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-4 KV AND MA (continued)


4. Adjust the mA:

a. Set TM1 of the SW10 dip switch to OFF. (Tube Current Adjustment Mode)

b. Push SW1(TEST) button on the Power Cont Assy. (The LEDs ST0 ∼ ST3 start to blink.)

c. Switch ON the SW4(XGON) and SW3(HV ON) switches, and note that the reading of the mA meter increase
gradually and settle at 40mA ± 4mA.

d. Switch OFF the SW4 and SW3 switches.

e. Set 120kv, 160mA on SW5 ∼ SW9 (refer to Table 2–2).

f. Switch ON the SW4 and SW3 switches, and verify that the mA meter should read a steady 160mA ± 8mA.

g. Switch OFF the SW4 and SW3 switches.

h. Set the dial switches (SW13(FIL2)∼SW11(FIL0)) to the indicated code (LEDs:D39 ∼ D50).
(see illustration 2–6)

i. Set TM1 of the SW10 dip switch to ON.

5. Disconnect the jumper cable from CN1 connector, then connect the cable from OC to the connector CN1.
(This allows On–Line Mode.)

6. Push SW12(Rest) button on the Power Cont Assy.


(This operation lets the CPU read data on SW14 ∼ SW11 and calculates the boost references for the other mA
stations.)

7. Restore the XG to original configuration.

2–12 X–RAY GENERATOR


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 3 2234976

SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION PAGE

SECTION 1 – OPERATOR CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1


1-1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1-2 CIRCUIT BOARDS IN NEST CHASSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3
1-2-1 CPW Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3
1-2-2 IPU2 Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–7
1-2-3 DISP Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–10
1-2-4 SBPU Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–13
1-2-5 TPC Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–15
1-2-6 MISC Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17
1-2-7 ISC Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–21
1-2-8 SCSI Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–23
1-2-9 ODC2 board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–26
1-2-10 MTC Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–31
1-2-11 COMX_3 Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–34
1-2-12 ETC Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–38
1-3 OTHER CIRCUIT BOARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–41
1-3-1 TPC SUB Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–41
1-3-2 AUDIO Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–43
1-4 SBB ASSY (BACKBOARD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–46
1-5 HARD DISK DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–47
1-5-1 HDD U0041ZA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–47
1-5-2 HDD 2146786 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–48
1-5 FFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–49

SECTION 2 – GANTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1


2-1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2-2 TGP BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2-2-1 Dip Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2-2-2 Service Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3

SECTION 3 – DAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1


3-1 ADC BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3-2 CIF BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2

SECTION 4 – X–RAY GENERATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1


4-1 CAUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4-2 POWER CONT ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2
4-3 INVERTER CONT ASSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5

i SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
blank 2234976

ii SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 3 2234976

SECTION 1 – OPERATOR CONSOLE

1-1 GENERAL

NOTICE

Cut power before removing or inserting any of the boards or plugs.

NOTICE

Electrostatic discharge.
It is essential to link yourself to ground potential by wearing an antistatic wrest strap. No
board should ever be accessed without this precaution.

Graphic Conventions

Illustration 1–1 Jumper Setting Example

Jumper
Socket Jumper
Pin

01B2 D ‘01B2’ indicates jumper of switch location on a Board


D Left illustration indicates that a jumper socket links pins 1 and 2.
1 2 3

1–1 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 3 2234976

1-1 GENERAL (continued)

Component Locations
The following illustration shows the locations of some components within the Operator Console, and slot # for the nest
chassis circuit boards.

Illustration 1–2 OC Component Locations

+12 VDC
Power Supply +5 VDC
Hard Disk Drive Power Supply

Slot No. Board Name Description


01 . . . CPW
02 . . . IPU2
03 . . . DISP
Interface Nest 04 . . . SBPU . . . . . . . . For Sytec 4000i, Plus Only
05 . . . TPC
Panel I/F 06 . . . MISC
Audio SV Amp 07 . . . ISC
08 . . . AUX1 . . . . . . . . For Option
DAS I/F 09 . . . AUX2 . . . . . . . . For Option
Slot No. 01 ∼ 10
Option:SCSI
ODC2
MTC
COMX3
ETC

1–2 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 3 2234976

1-2 CIRCUIT BOARDS IN NEST CHASSIS

1-2-1 CPW Board

Illustration 1–3 CPW Board

Dip SW (5A1)
CN3 Dip SW (8A1)
Jumper
(8J1)
Jumper (8D1)

Dip SW (10A1)

LED Dip SW (12A1)

CN4 Jumper
(19J1)
72111
Fuse

Push Switch

CN5

Jumper
(30C1)

Jumper
(30D1)

Battery

Note
D Three Jumpers (8D1, 8J1 and 19J1) are provided only for P9191WC.

1–3 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 3 2234976

1-2-1 CPW Board (continued)

Switch Settings
D SW 5A1 – is not used.

ON B–8A
‘1’

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ‘0’
Set to all ‘0’

D SW 8A1 – Test Mode Select – Normally set as illustrated below.

OFF : ‘0’
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
BPSL

00 : 9600bps 8 bit non parity, stop bit 1


RS232C Setting 01 : 1200bps 8 bit non parity, stop bit 1
10 : 2400bps 8 bit non parity, stop bit 1
11 : 19200bps 8 bit non parity, stop bit 1

Not used. Set to ‘0’.

1XX : SKIP TEST


Hardware Test Select 01X : OFF LINE TEST
001 : POWER ON TEST2
000 : POWER ON TEST1

D SW 10A1 – Boot Mode Select – Normally set as illustrated below.

OFF : ‘0’
1 2 3 4
DNP4
XXX0 : Boot from HD00
0001 : YMON
0101 : Boot from FD00
1X01 : Boot from FD01

1–4 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 3 2234976

1-2-1 CPW Board (continued)

Switch Settings
D SW 12A1 – HDD Number Setting – Normally set as illustrated below.

ON B–4A ‘1’

1 2 3 4 ‘0’

0XXX : One HDD


1XXX : Two HDDs

Jumper Settings
D 30D1 – Battery Back up for SRAM on CPW Board – Normally set as illustrated below.
VCC

µPD 431000
30D1

STBY
JP

VCC : SRAM is not backed up by battery.


STBY : SRAM is backed up by battery.

D 30C1 – Power ON Rest Enable/Disable – Normally set as illustrated below.

PON RST
T N

N : Enable

T : Disable

1–5 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 3 2234976

1-2-1 CPW Board (continued)

Jumper Settings
D For P9191WC CPW Board:

– 8D1 – Bus Time Out – Normally set as illustrated below.

BTO

16 µs

4 ms

– 19J1 – Bus Release every 16 word SCSI transfer – Normally set as illustrated below.

INTVL1

VRI VRI : Bus Release


O O : No Bus Release

– 8J1 – Bus Release Time (see 19J1 jumper) – Normally set as illustrated below.

INTVL2
1 1 : 1 µs

2 2 : 2 µs

3 3 : 3 µs

4 4 : 4 µs

1–6 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 3 2234976

1-2-2 IPU2 Board

Illustration 1–4 IPU2 Board

IPU SW Jumpers
(S5A1)
9S1 9V1 9X1
0
MD EXT SW
(S7A1) J10 J15
10
J5 J6 J7
INT VEC SW
(S9A1)
Mini BNC Jack
for Oscilloscope

J20 J25

1–7 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 3 2234976

1-2-2 IPU2 Board (continued)

Switch Settings
D IPU SW S5A1 – Selects the Recon processor (SBPU) option.

ON B–8A
‘1’
OFF : ‘0’
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ‘0’
8 OFF : SBPU is unavailable
8 ON : SBPU is available

D MD EXT SW S7A1 – Set according to the memory capacity and the number of SIMMs (Single In–Line
Memory Module) which are installed on the IPU2 Board

ON B–8A The left is the standard setting.


‘1’
OFF : ‘0’
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ‘0’

Slot Code 00 : J10, J11, J20, J21 are used.


01 : J10 to J12, J20 to J23 are used.
10 : J10 to J15, J20 to J25 are used.

Variation Code
Set according to SIMM memory capacity.
(See Table 1–5)

Spare bits
Set to ‘000’

ON B–8A The left setting is for IPU2 Board with


‘1’ EXT MD32M Assy.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ‘0’ OFF : ‘0’

D INT VEC SW S9A1 – Interrupt Vector Setting – Normally set as illustrated below.

ON B–8A
‘1’
OFF : ‘0’
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ‘0’

1–8 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 3 2234976

1-2-2 IPU2 Board (continued)

SIMM Settings

Table 1–5 SIMM Memory Capacity and SW Setting

ÇÇ
Ç
MD EXT SW Setting SIMM Mount Status

ÇÇ
Ç
CONN SIMM CONN SIMM

ÇÇ
Ç
J10 : U0024LN J20 : U0024LN
J11 : U0024LN J21 : U0024LN
$08
ÇÇ
Ç J12 : None J22 : None

ÇÇ
Ç
J13 : None J23 : None

ÇÇ
Ç
J14 : None J24 : None
J15 : None J25 : None

ÇÇ
Ç
Ú
ÚÚ
ÇÇ
Ç
Ú
ÚÚ
CONN SIMM
J10 : U0024LN
CONN SIMM
J20 : U0024LN

$09 ÇÇ
Ç
Ú
ÚÚ
ÇÇ
Ç
Ú
ÚÚ
J11
J12
: U0024LN
: U0026LN
J21
J22
: U0024LN
: U0026LN

ÇÇ
Ç
Ú
ÚÚ
J13 : U0026LN J23 : U0026LN
J14 : None J24 : None

ÇÇ
Ç
Ú
ÚÚ J15 : None J25 : None

Note :
ÇÚÚ Ú
ÇÚÚ
ÚÚ
ÇÚ Ú Ç
SIMM is not installed.

ÇÚÚ
ÚÚÚ Ç
ÇÚÚ
Ú Ú
Ç
SIMM (U0024LN_4MB)

ÇÚ Ú
Ú
SIMM (U0026LN_8MB)

Jumper Settings
D JP9S1–11S2, JP9V1–11V2, JP9X1–11X1 – Adjusts Internal Clock Frequency.

NOTICE

Do not change these settings. Each board has its own unique settings.

1–9 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 3 2234976

1-2-3 DISP Board

Illustration 1–5 DISP Board

ACRTC
WHITE VSYNC DAS

LD M40B M40A

1–10 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 3 2234976

1-2-3 DISP Board (continued)

Jumper Settings
D WHITE – OVL White Width Set – Sets the OVL dot timing. It is normally set to ‘15’ as illustrated below.

10
15
20
WHITE

D ACRTC – ACRTC Interrupt Level Set on System Bus – Normally set as illustrated below.

6
5
4
3
2
1
ACRTC

D VSYNC – VSYNC Interrupt Level Set on System Bus – Normally set as illustrated below.

6
5
4
3
2
1
VSYNC

1–11 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 3 2234976

1-2-3 DISP Board (continued)

Jumper Settings
D DAS – DAS Error Interrupt Level Set on System Bus – Normally set as illustrated below.

6
5
4
3
2
1
DAS

D M40A, M40B, LD – Adjusts Internal Clock Frequency.

NOTICE

Do not change these settings. Each board has its own unique settings.

1–12 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 3 2234976

1-2-4 SBPU Board


Note
This board is the standard one for CT Sytec 4000i and Sytec Plus. For other systems, it is optional.

When using the SBPU board, verify that the IPU SW S5A1 on the IPU board is set properly (see the
switch settings of IPU board for details).

Illustration 1–6 SBPU Board

JPR0

JPR1

JPR2

JPR3

JPR4

NOTICE

Do not change the setting of jumpers JPR0, JPR1, JPR2 and JPR3. Their settings are deter-
mined by the manufacturer.

1–13 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 3 2234976

1-2-4 SBPU Board (continued)

Jumper Settings
D JPR4 – Interrupt Level Set – Normally set as illustrated below.

INT0
INT1
INT2
INT3
INT4
INT5
INT7
INT8
JPR4

1–14 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 3 2234976

1-2-5 TPC Board

Illustration 1–7 TPC Board

Rest SW

CN3 Abort SW

HD 66484

HD 68000

CN4

Jumpers
CN5

CN6

1–15 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 3 2234976

1-2-5 TPC Board (continued)

Switch Settings
D SW04A1 – Mode Select – Normally set as illustrated below.

ON B–8A
‘1’
OFF : ‘0’
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ‘0’

Test Mode : ‘1’– Test Mode


: ‘0’ – Normal Mode

Touch Panel Type : ‘1’ – CT


: ‘0’ – Ultrasound

Not Used. Set to ‘0’

Jumper Settings
D J21B2 – Periodic Interrupt Interval – Normally set as illustrated below.

4 1

D J21C2 – I/O Bus Connector Select – Normally set as illustrated below.

DMP
Front Connector
Backplane Connector
RTX

1–16 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 3 2234976

1-2-6 MISC Board

Illustration 1–8 MISC Board

LED

Jumper
Dip SW (1D2)
(1A2)

CN4
Jumper
(3A5)

Jumper
CN5 (4A4)

LED

CN6

Dip SW
(6A27)
Jumper
CN7 (8W2)

1–17 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 3 2234976

1-2-6 MISC Board (continued)

Switch Settings
D SW6A27 – OC INTF SW – Normally set as illustrated below.

ON B–4A ‘1’
OFF : ‘0’
1 2 3 4 ‘0’
B3 B2 B1 B0
TGP ↔ OC Communication – Normally set to ‘OFF’
OFF : Enables communication between OC and TGP.
ON : Dummy communication module is connected to OC.

X–Ray On Backup Timer (see Table below).


Scan Time 1 1.7 2 2.3 3 3.6 5
(sec)
Back–up Timer 1.240 1.853 1.947 2.467 2.907 3.867 4.827
(sec)

Not used. Set to ‘0’


Not used. Set to ‘0’

D SW1A2 – MFC – KB – Not used. Set all bits to ‘OFF’.

ON B–8A
‘1’
OFF : ‘0’
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ‘0’

Not used. Set to ‘0’.

1–18 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 3 2234976

1-2-6 MISC Board (continued)

Jumper Settings
D 3A5 – Communication Protocol Set for spare SIO (RS232) – Normally set as illustrated below.

SD
RD
RST

CTS
DSR
DCD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

C
DCE
B
DTF
A
RD
SD
CTS
DSR
DCD
RST
DTR
N.C.
D 4A5 – Communication Protocol Set for MFC SIO (RS232) – Normally set as illustration below.
SD
RD
RST

CTS
DSR
DCD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

C
DCE
B
DTF
A
RD
SD
CTS
DSR
DCD
RST
DTR
N.C.

D 1D2 – Clock Frequency Set for TGP serial communication – Normally set as illustration below.

9.6 KHz
4.8 KHz
2.4 KHz
1.2 KHz

1–19 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 3 2234976

1-2-6 MISC Board (continued)

Jumper Settings
D 8W2 – Buzzer Loudness – Normally set as illustrated below.

1 2 3

Loudness Low
Loudness Mid
Loudness High

1–20 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 3 2234976

1-2-7 ISC Board

Illustration 1–9 ISC Board

J3

SW10B1

J5

1–21 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 3 2234976

1-2-7 ISC Board (continued)

Switch Settings
D SW10B1 – Normally set as illustrated below.

ON ND8 (Switches 1 to 4 are for J5 connector and


ON
switches 5 to 8 are for J3connector)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OFF

ON : DTE Mode
OFF : DCE Mode

ON : TXC/RXC not used.


OFF : TXC/RXC used.

ON : DA
OFF : DB

ON : RS232C
OFF : RS422A

ON : DTE Mode
OFF : DCE Mode

ON : TXC/RXC not used.


OFF : TXC/RXC used.

ON : DA
OFF : DB

ON : RS232C
OFF : RS422A

1–22 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 3 2234976

1-2-8 SCSI Board

Illustration 1–10 SCSI Board

Jumper Pin

CN3

2H1 2H3 2J2 2J4


2H2 2J1 2J3 CN1
Reset SW

Abort SW

CN4

Jumper Pin
(23G2)

3.2A/250V
CN2

LEDs

1–23 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 3 2234976

1-2-8 SCSI Board (continued)

Switch Settings
D 09G1 – Base Address – Normally set to ‘50H’ as illustrated below.

ON B–8A
‘1’

‘0’ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

D 16H2 – SCSI ID – Normally set to ‘7H’ as illustrated below.

B–4A
‘1’ ON

‘0’ 1 2 3 4

LSB
ID
MSB
(Reserve)

D 27A1 – Test Mode – Normally set to ‘00H’ as illustrated below (No test).

ON ND8
ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OFF
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
LSB

Test No. [00H – 0DH]

MSB

Engineering use only : set to ‘0’

LSB
Test Mode [00H – 03H]
MSB 00 :No test
01 : Signal test
02 : Loop test (error stop)
03 : Loop test (error no stop)

1–24 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 3 2234976

1-2-8 SCSI Board (continued)

Jumper Settings
D 2H1, 2H2, 2H3, 2J1 – IRQ Level – Normally all set to ‘2’ as illustrated below.

2H1 2H2 2H3 2J1


1
2
3
4
5
6

IRQ

D 2J2, 2J3, 2J4 – Bus Request Level – Normally set to ‘1’ as illustrated below.

2J2 2J3 2J4


0
1
2
3
4

BR

D 23G2 – ROM Select – Normally set to ‘1’ as illustrated below.

2 1

23G2

1–25 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 3 2234976

1-2-9 ODC2 board

Illustration 1–11 ODC2 Board

Reset SW 0K2

BR
1K1
1K2
Status LED

4K1

IRQ
Timer 5K1
5K2

11E1 SIZE
Test SW (10A1)
11E2 INTVL
Address (14A1)
CRC (15A1) 17H1
BA

FULL
EMP
CRC
CEN
BEN

GPIB 25K1
VNO

1–26 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 3 2234976

1-2-9 ODC2 board (continued)

Switch Settings
D SW17H1 – Base Address – Normally set as illustrated below.

ON
‘1’

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ‘0’

A9 : Address Bus Signal A9 (LSB)


A10 : Address Bus Signal A10
A11 : Address Bus Signal A11
A12 : Address Bus Signal A12
A13 : Address Bus Signal A13
A14 : Address Bus Signal A14
A15 : Address Bus Signal A15
‘0’ – Non–privileged I/O,
‘1’ – Supervisor I/O

D SW25K1 – Interrupt Vector Number – Normally set as illustrated below.

ON
‘1’

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ‘0’

D0 : Data Bus Signal D0 (LSB)


D1 : Data Bus Signal D1
D2 : Data Bus Signal D2
D3 : Data Bus Signal D3
D4 : Data Bus Signal D4
D5 : Data Bus Signal D5
D6 : Data Bus Signal D6
D7 : Data Bus Signal D7 (MSB)

1–27 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 3 2234976

1-2-9 ODC2 board (continued)

Switch Settings
D SW14A1 – GP–IB Address – Normally set to ‘10H’ as illustrated below.

ON
‘1’

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ‘0’

D0 : Data Bus Signal D0 (LSB)


D1 : Data Bus Signal D1
D2 : Data Bus Signal D2
D3 : Data Bus Signal D3
D4 : Data Bus Signal D4
D5 : Data Bus Signal D5
D6 : Data Bus Signal D6
D7 : Data Bus Signal D7 (MSB)

D SW10A1 – Test Mode Select – Normally set as illustrated below.

ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF

B0 : Test Number (LSB)


:
:
B3 : Test Number (MSB)
B4 : Not used. Set to ‘OFF’
B5 : Not used. Set to ‘OFF’
B6 : Test Mode (LSB)
B7 : Test Mode (MSB)
B7 B6 Mode
0 0 Single
0 1 Repeat & Error Stop
1 0 Repeat & Error Continue
1 1 Not Select

1–28 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 3 2234976

1-2-9 ODC2 board (continued)

Jumper Settings
D J04K1, 05K1, 05K2 – Interrupt Request Level – Normally all set to ‘2’ as illustrated below.

6 5 4 3 2 1

4K1

IRQ
5K1

5K2

D J00K2, 01K1, 01K2 – Bus Request Level – Normally all set to ‘1’ as illustrated below.

0 1 2 3 4

0K2

1K1 BR

1K2

1–29 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 3 2234976

1-2-9 ODC2 board (continued)

Jumper Settings
D J11E2 – DMA Block Time Interval – Normally set to ‘16mS’ as illustrated below.

16 8 4 2 1 ms

11E2

D J11E1 – DMA Block Size – Normally set to ‘16’ as illustrated below.

16 8 4 2 1 word/block

11E1

D J15A1 – CRC Check Enable/Disable – Normally set to ‘CRC’ as illustrated below.

CRC

1–30 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 3 2234976

1-2-10 MTC Board

Illustration 1–12 MTC Board

1J1
1J2
2J1
3J1
Dip SW
(4H1)

CN1

CN3

LED
Push
SW
CN2
Dip SW
(24A1)
Jumper
(26E1)

1–31 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 3 2234976

1-2-10 MTC Board (continued)

Switch Settings
D SW24A1 – Test Mode – Not used. It is normally set as illustrated below.

ON ‘1’

1 2 3 4 ‘0’

D SW4H1 – Interrupt Vector Number – Normally set to ‘FCH’ as illustrated below.

ON
‘0’
Note : OFF : ‘1’
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ‘1’

D0 : Vector Number (LSB)


D1 :
D2 :
D3 :
D4 :
D5 :
D6 :
D7 : Vector Number (MSB)

1–32 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 3 2234976

1-2-10 MTC Board (continued)

Jumper Settings
D J26E – ROM Select – Normally set to ‘64K’ as illustrated below.

64K ROM
128K ROM

D J03J1 – Interrupt Request Level – Normally set to ‘2’ as illustrated below.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

D J01J1, 01J2, 02J1 – MTC Bus Request Level – Normally set to ‘1’ as illustrated below.

0 1 2 3 4

1J1

BG

1J2

BR 2J1

0 1 2 3 4

1–33 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 3 2234976

1-2-11 COMX_3 Board

Illustration 1–13 COMX_3 Board

SW10J

SW14A1

SW24K1
J24J1

J26K1 J26K2
J27K2
J27K1 J27K3

1–34 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 3 2234976

1-2-11 COMX_3 Board (continued)

Switch Settings
D SW24K1 – Interrupt Vector Number – Normally set to ‘C6H’ as illustrated below.

ON
‘1’

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ‘0’

D0 : Data Bus Signal D0 (LSB)


D1 : Data Bus Signal D1
D2 : Data Bus Signal D2
D3 : Data Bus Signal D3
D4 : Data Bus Signal D4
D5 : Data Bus Signal D5
D6 : Data Bus Signal D6
D7 : Data Bus Signal D7 (MSB)

D SW10J1 – Base Address of Command Packet – Normally set to ‘20H’ as illustrated below.

ON
‘1’

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ‘0’

A9 : Address Bus Signal A9 (LSB)


A10 : Address Bus Signal A10
A11 : Address Bus Signal A11
A12 : Address Bus Signal A12
A13 : Address Bus Signal A13
A14 : Address Bus Signal A14
A15 : Address Bus Signal A15
‘0’ – Non–privileged I/O,
‘1’ – Supervisor I/O

1–35 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 3 2234976

1-2-11 COMX_3 Board (continued)

Switch Settings
D SW14A1 – Communication Mode – Normally set to ‘C0H’ as illustrated below.

ON
‘1’

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ‘0’

Not used. Set to ‘0’


Not used. Set to ‘0’
Not used. Set to ‘0’
Not used. Set to ‘0’
Not used. Set to ‘0’
Not used. Set to ‘0’
‘1’ – Normal Interrupt
‘0’ – Communication Interrupt
‘1’ – Slave Board
‘0’ – Master Board

1–36 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 3 2234976

1-2-11 COMX_3 Board (continued)

Jumper Settings
D J24J1 – COMX Interrupt Request Level – Normally set to ‘2’ as illustrated below.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

D J26K2, 27K2, 27K3 – COMX Bus Request Level – Normally set to ‘1’ as illustrated below.

0 1 2 3 4

26K2

27K2

27K3

0 1 2 3 4

D J26K1 – DMA Block Time Interval – Normally set to ‘2 µsec’ as illustrated below.

16 8 4 2

26K1

D J27K1 – DMA Block Size – Normally set to ‘16 words/block’ as illustrated below.

16 8 4 2 1

27K1

1–37 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 3 2234976

1-2-12 ETC Board

Illustration 1–14 ETC Board

SW3L
SW4A
SW4J

LED SW6A
SW8A CN1

CN3

SW15L

CN2

CN4

J27D

1–38 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 3 2234976

1-2-12 ETC Board (continued)

Switch Settings
D SW4J – Base Address of Command Packet – Normally set to ‘30H’ as illustrated below.

ON
‘1’

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ‘0’

D SW15L – Interrupt Vector Number – Normally set to ‘C8H’ as illustrated below.

ON
‘1’

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ‘0’

D SW3L – ETC Processor Number – Normally set to ‘AH’ as illustrated below.

ON ‘1’

1 2 3 4 ‘0’

D SW4A – Serial Interface (RS232C) Baud Mode – Normally set to ‘00H’ as illustrated below.

ON
‘1’

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ‘0’

B0 : Not used. Set to ‘0’


B1 : Not used. Set to ‘0’ B7 B6 Baud (bps)
B2 : Not used. Set to ‘0’ ON ON 19200
B3 : Not used. Set to ‘0’ ON OFF 1200
B4 : Not used. Set to ‘0’ OFF ON 2400
OFF OFF 9600
B5 : Not used. Set to ‘0’
B6 : Serial Interface Baud. Normally OFF.
B7 : Serial Interface Baud. Normally OFF.

1–39 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 3 2234976

1-2-12 ETC Board (continued)

Switch Setting
D SW6A – Ethernet Address and ETC Manufactured Data Set Mode – Normally set to ‘0H’ as illustrated
below.

ON ‘1’

1 2 3 4 ‘0’

B0 : Not used. Set to ‘0’


B1 : Not used. Set to ‘0’
B2 : Ethernet address set. Normally OFF. ‘1’:Verify or set.
B3 : Not used. Set to ‘0’

D SW8A – Power On Test Perform/Skip/Off–Line Test Set – Normally set to ‘0H’ as illustrated below.

ON ‘1’

1 2 3 4 ‘0’

B0 : Not used. Set to ‘0’


B1 : Not used. Set to ‘0’
B2 : Off–Line Test :‘1’ – Perform test
:‘0’ – Not perform test
B3 : Power On Test:‘1’ – Skip test
:‘0’ – Perform test

Jumper Settings
D J27D – Debug Port – A port for connecting a debug machine. No setting to be made.

J27D
1 2

7 8

1–40 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 3 2234976

1-3 OTHER CIRCUIT BOARDS

1-3-1 TPC SUB Board

Illustration 1–15 TPC Sub Board

CN2 CN4 CN3

CN6

CN5

CN1

CN7
9C1

J1 J2
CN10
CN8 11C1

CN12 CN11

1–41 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 3 2234976

1-3-1 TPC SUB Board (continued)

Switch Settings
D SW9C1 – Parity Bit/Stop Bit – Normally set as illustrated below.

ON ‘1’

1 2 3 4 ‘0’

B0 : ‘1’ – Parity Bit Enable


: ‘0’ – Parity Bit Disable
B1 : ‘1’ – Odd Parity
: ‘0’ – Even Parity
B2 : ‘1’ – 2 Stop Bit
: ‘0’ – 1 Stop Bit
B3 :Not used. Set to ‘0’

D SW11C1 – Baud Rate/Touch Panel Scan Rate – Normally set as illustrated below.

ON B3 B2 B1 B0 Interval (ms)
‘1’ 1 1 1 1 20
1 1 1 0 20
1 1 0 1 40
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ‘0’
1 1 0 0 50
B0 : 1 0 1 1 60
1 0 1 0 70
B1 : 1 0 0 1 80
Touch Panel
B2 : Scan Rate 1 0 0 0 90
B3 : 0 X X X 100
B4 : B7 B6 B5 B4 Baud Rate
B5 : 1 1 1 1 19200
Baud Rate 1 1 1 0 9600
B6 :
1 1 0 1 4800
B7 : 1 1 0 0 2400
1 0 1 1 1200
1 0 1 0 600

Jumper Settings
D J1, J2 – RS232C Control Mode – Normally set as illustrated below.

1 2 1 2 3
J1 J2
(Open)

1–42 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 3 2234976

1-3-2 AUDIO Board

Illustration 1–16 Audio Board

JP3

JP2
SW2

SW1
VR5 JP1

VR1
VR3

VR4
VR2
VR6

Note
The audio Board must be revision 3 or above.

1–43 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 3 2234976

1-3-2 AUDIO Board (continued)

Switch Settings
D SW1 – Auto Voice Start

D SW2 – Audio Voice Test Pattern Select – Normally set to ‘F’ as illustrated below.

C : Hold your breath


D : Breathe in, Breathe out, Hold your breath
E : Breathe
F : Breathe in, Hold your breath
C
D
F E

Jumper Settings
D JP1 – Auto or Manual – Normally set to ‘MNL’ as illustrated below.

JP1

MNL AUTO

D JP2 – X–Ray On Buzzer – Normally set to ‘NORM’ as illustrated below.

JP2

TEST NORM

D JP3 – Foot Switch – Normally set to ‘NORM’ as illustrated below.

JP3

NORM TEST

1–44 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 3 2234976

1-3-2 AUDIO Board (continued)

Variable Resistor Settings


D VR1 – X–Ray On Buzzer – The default setting is as illustrated below.

D VR2 – Auto Switch – Do not adjust. Normally set as illustrated below.

D VR3 – Auto Voice (Gantry) – Do not adjust. Normally set as illustrated below.

D VR4 – Auto Voice (OC) – The default setting is as illustrated below.

D VR5 – Feedback Prevention – The default setting is as illustrated below.

D VR6 – Feedback Gain – The default setting is as illustrated below.

1–45 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 3 2234976

1-4 SBB ASSY (BACKBOARD)

Illustration 1–17 SBB Assy

J081 J071 J061 J041 J031 J021

Jumper Settings
D J021, 031, 041, 061, 071, 081 – System Bus Priority Jumpers

(Setting Example)

BG4
Jumper Slot No. Circuit Board Set
BG3
J021 Slot# 02 IPU2 open
BG2 J031 Slot# 03 DISP open
J041 Slot# 04 SBPU close (Note1)
BG1 J061 Slot# 06 MISC open
J071 Slot# 07 ISC close (Note2)
BG0 J081 Slot# 08 AUX1 close (Note3)
IACK
(Close) (Open)

Note1 : Open all 6 jumper plugs for Sytec 4000i / Plus.


Note2 : Open all 6 jumper plugs if that slot contains a circuit board.
Note3 : There is NO need to do re–setting when AUX2 slot is used.

1–46 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 3 2234976

1-5 HARD DISK DRIVE

1-5-1 HDD U0041ZA

Illustration 1–18 Hard Disk Drive – U0041ZA

Type 1 Type 2

JP7 JP7
JP1 JP1
(CNH7) (CNH7)
(CNH1) (CNH1)

SCSI Terminator SCSI Terminator

Board Number Board Number


B17B–1790–0030A B17B–1790–0250A
B17B–1790–0040A
B17B–1790–0050A

Normal Jumper Settings

D JP1 (CNH1) D JP7 (CNH7)

1 2 7 1

8 2
This JP7 setting shows the HDD is
assigned as SCSI ID = 0

23 24

Terminator
D The terminator direction for installation of the type 1 differs from on of the type 2. Install them to the proper
direction, referring to illustration 1–18.
For Standard Disk : Leave all 4 terminators on the disk.
For Auxiliary Disk : Not available.

1–47 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 3 2234976

1-5-2 HDD 2146786

Illustration 1–19 Hard Disk Drive – 2146786

CN5

RP1

CHN1

Normal Jumper and Terminator Settings

HD#0 HD#1
CHN1
8 7 8 7

6 5 6 5

4 3 4 3

2 1 2 1

RP1 (Terminator Module) Installed Removed

8 7 Open : Command Start


Close : Auto Start
6 5
SCSI ID ‘22’ SCSI ID 5–6 3–4 1–2
4 3
SCSI ID ‘2’ 0 Open Open Open
2 1 1 Open Open Close
SCSI ID ‘21’ 2 Open Close Open
3 Open Close Close
4 Close Open Open
5 Close Open Close
6 Close Close Open
7 Close Close Close

1–48 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 3 2234976

1-6 FLOPPY DISK DRIVE

1-6-1 FDD 2191376 or 2349231

Normal Jumper Setting

2191376 (TEAC, FD–235HG) 2349231 (Y–E DATA, YD–702D)

G
F
E
D
C
B
A

1–49 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
blank 2234976

1–50 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

SECTION 2 – GANTRY

2-1 GENERAL

WARNING!
ROTATION HAZARD !
TURN OFF THE ‘SCAN’ BREAKER LOCATED AT THE REAR OF THE GANTRY BASE AND
SYS/OFF/MNL SWITCHES ON THE TGP BOARD BEFORE INSERTING ANY OBJECT INTO OR
WORKING ON THE GANTRY.

2–1 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-2 TGP BOARD

Illustration 2–1 TGP Board

Service Switches

Dip Switch
(S9∼S16)

Dip Switch
(S1∼S8)

2–2 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-2 TGP BOARD (continued)

2-2-1 Dip Switches


If any settings of the TGP dip switches are changed and then reset to their original settings, verify the following accord-
ing to Table below.

Table 2–1 Normal Setting of TGP Dip Switches

Dip Switch Location Normal Setting


S1 ∼ S8 7N All Switch : OFF

S9 ∼ S16 4N

2-2-2 Service Switches


The following four switches on the TGP Board provide the Off–Line control of Gantry rotation.

Illustration 2–2 TGP Service Switches

Normal Setting of TGP Service Switches


SYS ABT FAST CCW
SYS/OFF/MNL . . . . . . SYS
HOME

ABT/SVE/FIX ...... FIX


SVE
OFF

MID

FAST/MID/SLOW . . . . . SLOW
CCW/HOME/CW . . . . . HOME
MNL FIX SLOW CW

NOTICE

Do not set the SYS/OFF/MNL switch to OFF except in emergency while the Gantry is rotating,
or the static brake will be damaged.

2–3 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

2-2 TGP BOARD (continued)

2-2-2 Service Switches (continued)

Switch Switch Position Function


SYS SYS The Gantry rotation is controlled by system
(Normal Position)
OFF
F

OFF The Gantry will not rotate.


SVE Signal : OFF
MNL Voltage Command to Servo Amp : 0V
Static Brake : ON
MNL The Gantry rotation is controlled with ABT/SVE/FIX, FAST/MID/SLOW,
CCW/HOME/CW switches.

Switch Switch Location Function


ABT ABT This is a spring loaded switch which starts rotation the Gantry and enables the
rotation direction (or final position) to be determined by the CCW/HOME/CW
SVE

switch. Rotation Speed: 15.0 sec/Rev


SV

SVE The Gantry will not rotate.


FIX (Normal Position) SVE Signal : ON
Voltage Command to Servo Amp : 0V
FIX Same as ABT except that the speed is determined by the FAST/MID/SLOW
switch.

Switch Switch Position Function


FAST FAST Fast Speed: 1.83 sec/Rev

MID Medium Speed: 2.74 sec/Rev (note1)


MID

3.65 sec/Rev

SLOW SLOW Slow Speed: 4.56 sec/Rev

note1: These speed can be selectable by setting the Dip Switch S4 (location 7N) of the TGP Board to On or OFF.
Normally set S4 to OFF position (2.74 sec/Rev)

Switch Switch Position Function


CCW CCW Counterclockwise Rest Position
HOME
E

HOME Home (Zero Degree) Position


H

CW Clockwise Rest Position


CW

2–4 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

SECTION 3 – DAS

3-1 ADC BOARD

Illustration 3–1 ADC Board

ADC Board 2106694 ADC Board P9154XA

J1 J2 SW3
J1 J5 J6
J3
SW1 SW2 J3 J4

SW4

SW4

Switch/Jumper Normal Setting

ADC Board 2106694 ADC Board P9154XA


SW4 ‘0’ position SW1 ∼ SW3 ‘NORM’ position
J1 Installed SW4 ‘0’ position
J3 ‘NORM’ position J1 and J2 Installed
J5 and J6 ‘NORM’ position J3 ‘CAL1’ position
J4 ‘0’ position

3–1 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

3-2 CIF BOARD

Illustration 3–2 CIF Board

CIF Board 2108372 CIF Board P9154YG

SW1

J1
J4
J3 SW2
J2 SW1
J1

Switch/Jumper Normal Setting

CIF Board 2108372 CIF Board P9154YG


SW4 ‘0’ position SW1 and SW2 ‘OFF’ position
J1 ‘MODE0’ position J1 ‘MODE0’ position
J2 ‘OFF’ position
J3 ‘OFF’ position
J4 ‘ON’ position

3–2 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

SECTION 4 – X–RAY GENERATOR

4-1 CAUTION

CAUTION
Although the system has been turned OFF, the capacitors inside the cabinet may be still dis-
charging. They require a few minutes to discharge to a safe level, so keep sway from them, or
electric shock will result.

CAUTION
Electric Shock Hazard !
Before connecting or disconnecting the high voltage connectors to/from the high voltage
tanks or x–ray tube, turn OFF the main circuit breaker (CB6). Also, upon disconnecting the
high voltage connectors, discharge the residual charges.

CAUTION
Explosion Hazard !
When replacing electrolytic capacitors, be sure to install them with correct polarities. When
applying electricity to them for the first time after replacement, keep away from them.

CAUTION
Unstable electric output.
Do not connect digital multimeter on terminals 1 ∼ 4 (VFB1–H ∼ VFB4–L) on TANK Conn Assys
(on positive and negative sides); the terminals are connected to the outputs of BLEEDER As-
sys. The input capacitance of a digital multimeter can not be negligible for measuring those
outputs. If connected, the KV control may be interfered, causing unstable generator outputs.

4–1 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

4-2 POWER CONT ASSY

Illustration 4–1 Power Cont Assy

J3 J4

J9 J8

SW10
J7
J1

SW14
J2

4–2 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

4-2 POWER CONT ASSY (continued)

Switch Settings
D SW4 – FIL3 – Normally set to ‘0H’

D SW10 – Normally set as illustrated below.

TM0 ON
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
TM7

Jumper Settings
D J1 –SOFT0 – Normally set to ‘L’ as illustrated below.

J1

L H

D J2 –SOFT1 – Normally set to ‘L’ as illustrated below.

J2

L H

D J3 – HVMODE1 – Normally set to ‘L’ as illustrated below.

J3

L H

D J4 – HVMODE0 – Normally set to ‘L’ as illustrated below.

J4

L H

4–3 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

4-2 POWER CONT ASSY (continued)

Jumper Settings
D J7 – Normally set to ‘FB’ as illustrated below.

J7

FB MNL

D J8 – Normally set to ‘NML’ as illustrated below.

J8

NML TEST

D J9 – Normally set to ‘NML’ as illustrated below.

J9

NML TEST

4–4 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

4-3 INVERTER CONT ASSY

Illustration 4–2 Inverter Cont Assy

S1

S2

S3

S4

S5

S6

S7

S8

S9

S10

J1

Jumper Settings
D J1 – Normally set as illustrated below.

4–5 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

4-3 INVERTER CONT ASSY (continued)

Switch Settings
D S1 and S2 – LSPD ACC (Low Speed Acceleration) – Normally set as illustrated below.

S1 S2
3 4 5 3 4 5
2 6 2 6
1 7 1 7
0 8 0 8
F 9 F 9
E A E A
D C B D C B

D S3 and S4 – LSPD RUN (Low Speed Run) – Normally set as illustrated below.

S3 S4
3 4 5 3 4 5
2 6 2 6
1 7 1 7
0 8 0 8
F 9 F 9
E A E A
D C B D C B

D S5 and S6 – HSPD ACC (High Speed Acceleration) – Normally set as illustrated below.

S5 S6
3 4 5 3 4 5
2 6 2 6
1 7 1 7
0 8 0 8
F 9 F 9
E A E A
D C B D C B

D S7 and S8 – HSPD RUN (High Speed Run) – Normally set as illustrated below.

S7 S8
3 4 5 3 4 5
2 6 2 6
1 7 1 7
0 8 0 8
F 9 F 9
E A E A
D C B D C B

D S9 and S10 – BRK (Brake) – Normally set as illustrated below.

S9 S10
3 4 5 3 4 5
2 6 2 6
1 7 1 7
0 8 0 8
F 9 F 9
E A E A
D C B D C B

4–6 SWITCH/JUMPER SETTING


CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

APPENDIX A – SYMBOLS AND CLASSIFICATION

Symbol Publication Description

417–5032 Alternating Current

335–1 Three–phase Alternating Current


3

335–1 Three–phase Alternating Current with neutral con-


3N ductor

Direct Current

417–5019 Protective Earth (Ground)

348 Attention, consult ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTS

417–5008 OFF (Power: disconnection from the mains)

417–5007 ON (Power: connection to the mains)

Warning, HIGH VOLTAGE

Emergency Stop

A–1
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

Symbol Publication Description


Type B

417–5339 X–ray Source Assembly Emitting

417–5009 Standby

Start

Table Set

Abort

Intercom

(on Operator Console)


Power On: light on
Standby: light off

A–2
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

Symbol Description
Microphone (Mic)

Contrast

Brightness

60_C System storage prior to installation:


Maintain storage temperature between –10° C and +60° C

–10_C

System storage prior to installation:


Maintain non–condensing storage
humidity below 95%
DO NOT store system longer than 90 days

Humidity 5–95%
Excluding Condensation

Air Pressure System storage and shipment:


Maintain Air Pressure between 750 and 1060hPa
750–1060hPa

A–3
CT SYTEC/SYTEC I SERIES
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS FUNCTIONAL CHECK / ADJUSTMENT
REV 0 2234976

CLASS 1 EQUIPMENT
Any permanently installed equipment containing operator or patient accessible surfaces must provide backup protec-
tion against electric shock,in case the BASIC INSULATION fails. In addition to BASIC INSULATION,Class1 equip-
ment contains a direct connection to a PROTECTIVE(EARTH) CONDUCTOR which prevents shocks when a person
touches a broken piece of equipment or touches two different equipment surfaces simultaneously.

TYPE B EQUIPMENT
CLASS I, II, or III EQUIPMENT or EQUIPMENT with INTERNAL ELECTRICAL POWER SOURCES provide an ade-
quate degree of protection against electric shock arising from (allowable) LEAKAGE CURRENTS or a breakdown
in the reliability of the protective earth connection.

ORDINARY EQUIPMENT
Enclosed EQUIPMENT without protection against the ingress of water.

OPERATION 0f EQUIPMENT
CONTINUOUS OPERATION WITH INTERMITTENT LOADING.

Operation in which EQUIPMENT is connected continuously to the SUPPLY MAINS.The stated permissible loading
time is so short that the long term on–load operating temperature is not attained.The ensuing interval in loading is,
however, not sufficiently long for cooling down to the long term no–load operating temperature.

EQUIPMENT not suitable for use in the presence of a FLAMMABLE ANESTHETIC MIXTURE WITH AIR or WITH
OXYGEN or NITROUS OXIDE

CLEANING
The ProSpeed S series system is NOT WATERPROOF. It is NOT designed to protect internal components against
the ingress of liquids.Clean external system surfaces(Gantry,table,consoles and accessories)with a soft cloth dipped
in hot water and wrung DAMP/DRY. (NOT dripping!) IF NECESSARY, use only mild (dish washing liquid) soap to re-
move dirt.

NOTICE

Avoid damage to equipment! Some ”spray and wipe”cleaners etch and permanently cloud
clear plastic surfaces!! Use only warm water and mild liquid soap to clean surfaces.

A–4
GE Medical Systems: Telex 3797371
P.O. Box 414, Milwaukee, Wisconsin 53201 U.S.A.
(Asia, Pacific, Latin America, North America)

GE Medical Systems – Europe: Telex 698626


283, rue de la Miniére, B.P. 34, 78533 Buc Cedex, France